2011 insight - service expresstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/m81111/m81111om.pdf · 2011...

2011 InsightOwner’s Manual

(Unlinked)

This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web use. This is due to changes

in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a

hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.

P/N 00X31-TM8-© 2010 American Honda Motor Co., Inc. - All Rights Reserved 6100

This owner’s manual should be considered apermanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This owner’s manual covers all models of theInsight. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

Images throughout this owner’s manual(including the front cover) represent featuresand equipment that are available on some,but not all, models. Your particular modelmay not have some of these features.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice and withoutincurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owner’s Identif ication

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

10/09/02 13:41:15 31TM8610_001

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the Maintenance Minder shown inthe instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while itpreserves your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep inmind that your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the manysystems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfactionand will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2011 Honda Insight was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

i

TM

10/09/02 13:41:20 31TM8610_002

－

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone elseexcept as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The datacan be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It mayalso be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention ActThe airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials specialhandling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/

Introduction

WARNING:

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. Thesedevices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failureof any airbag system component.

ii

10/09/02 13:41:24 31TM8610_003

－

－

－

－

－

－

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

on the vehicle.

how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

Safety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety Section

Safety Labels

Instructions

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

10/09/02 13:41:34 31TM8610_004

10/09/02 13:41:36 31TM8610_005

(seat belts, SRS, and child protection)

(fluid capacities and tire pressures)

(main controls)

(indicators, gauges, multi-information display, dashboard, and steering column)

(climate control, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, and other convenience items)

(fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)

(engine and transmission operation)

(minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)

(flat tire, jump starting, overheating, and fuses)

(vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)

(warranty and contact information)

(how to order)

Contents

............................................................Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

................................................................................................................................................Index . I

..................................................Service Information Summary . last page

...............................................................................................Your Vehicle at a Glance . 3

.......Instruments and Controls . 59

............Features . 159

.......................................................................Before Driving . 295

.........................................................................................Driving . 313

.................................................Maintenance . 349

........................................Taking Care of the Unexpected . 399

..............................................Technical Information . 429

..................Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) . 445

..................................................................................Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) . 449

IND

EX

1

10/09/02 13:41:45 31TM8610_006

A summary of the information youneed when you pull up to the fuelpump.

How to order manuals and othertechnical literature.

A convenient reference to thesections in this manual.

A quick reference to the maincontrols in your vehicle.

What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to loadluggage and other cargo.

The proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park.

A summary of the warrantiescovering your new vehicle, and howto contact us for any reason. Refer toyour warranty manual for detailedinformation.

The Maintenance Minder showsyou when you need to take yourvehicle to the dealer for maintenanceservice. There is also a list of thingsto check and instructions on how tocheck them.

ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,and technical information.

This section covers several problemsmotorists sometimes experience,and details how to handle them.

Important information about theproper use and care of your vehicle’sseat belts, an overview of thesupplemental restraint system, andvaluable information on how toprotect children with child restraints.

Explains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator and gauge,the multi-information display, andhow to use the controls on thedashboard and steering column.

How to operate the climate controlsystem, the audio system, and otherconvenience features.

Overview of Contents

Contents

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Driver and Passenger Safety

Instruments and Controls

Before Driving

Driving

Maintenance

Warranty and CustomerRelations(U.S. and Canada only)

Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

Index

Service Information Summary

Technical Information

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Features

2

TM

10/09/02 13:42:03 31TM8610_007

＊＊

＊

＊＊ Refer to the navigation system manual.

1 :2 :

If equippedCONTINUED

Your Vehicle at a GlanceY

ourV

ehicleata

Glance

3

MULTI-INFORMATIONDISPLAY(P.72)

(P.62)

(P.153)

(P.166)

(P.323)

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORSGAUGES

ECON BUTTON(P.124)

DOOR LOCK TAB(P.130)

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH(P.130)

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES(P.146)

PASSENGER’SFRONT AIRBAG(P.10)

(P.160)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION(CVT)

USB ADAPTERCABLE(P.195, 203)

PADDLE SHIFTERS(P.328)

EX model with navigation system is shown.

MIRROR CONTROLS(P.144)

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON(P.122)(P.72, 75)

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE(P.300)

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

DRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAG(P.10)

NAVIGATION SYSTEMAUDIO SYSTEM

11

2

10/09/02 13:42:12 31TM8610_008

＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.1 :2 :3 :

If equipped

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONSMULTI-INFORMATION BUTTONS

HORN

(P.125)

(P.121)(P.76)

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENTS

(P.268)WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS(P.117)

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS CONTROL KNOB

(P.76)MULTI-INFORMATIONBUTTONS

KM/MILE CHANGE KNOB(P.73)

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR(P.35)

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRROR(P.123/145)

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK(P.264)

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET


(P.210)

(P.153)

BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINKSYSTEM VOICE CONTROLBUTTONS (P.271)

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROL BUTTONS

(P.118)

(P.263)

(P.346)

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICECONTROL BUTTONS(P.271)

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA )SYSTEM OFF SWITCH

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

2

2

1

2

3

2

3

2

3

2

10/09/02 13:42:19 31TM8610_009

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 8

.......................................Seat Belts . 9.........................................Airbags . 10

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 12.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 12

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 14............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 15

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 165. Fasten and Position the

.............................Seat Belts . 176. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 18.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19...Additional Safety Precautions . 20

Additional Information About.......................Your Seat Belts . 21

..Seat Belt System Components . 21......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 22

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 23

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 24Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 25......Airbag System Components . 25

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 28

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 32How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 33..How the SRS Indicator Works . 34

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 34

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 35

.............................Airbag Service . 36...Additional Safety Precautions . 37

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 38

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 38

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 39

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 39

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 41

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 41

...Additional Safety Precautions . 42Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 43.......................Protecting Infants . 43

.........Protecting Small Children . 44.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 45....................Installing a Child Seat . 46

...............................With LATCH . 47.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 49

..............................With a Tether . 50...........Protecting Larger Children . 52

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 52..................Using a Booster Seat . 53

When Can a Larger Child Sit in.........................................Front . 54

...Additional Safety Precautions . 55.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 56

...................................Safety Labels . 57

Driver and Passenger SafetyD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

5

10/09/02 13:42:23 31TM8610_010

－

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat(see pages ).

17

38 55

Important Safety Precautions

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Don’t Drink and DriveRestrain All Children

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

6

10/09/02 13:42:30 31TM8610_011

Engaging in mobile phoneconversation or other activities thatkeep you from paying close attentionto the road, other vehicles andpedestrians could lead to a crash.Remember, situations can changequickly, and only you can decidewhen it is safe to divert attentionaway from driving.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).389

Pay Appropriate Attention to theTask of Driving Safely

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Important Safety PrecautionsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

7

10/09/02 13:42:35 31TM8610_012

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment, front and rear crushzones, a collapsible steering column,and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting inthe correct position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

8

(2)

(6)

(4)

(2)

(10)

(8)

(5)

(11)

(8)

(3)(9)

(1)

(10)

(7)

(7)

(9) (12)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Door Locks(11) Seat Belt Tensioners(12) Occupant Position Detection

System (OPDS) Sensor

10/09/02 13:42:42 31TM8610_013

－－－－

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including:

frontal impactsside impactsrear impactsrollovers

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces and territoriesrequire you to wear seat belts.

Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What You Should Do:

Your Vehicle’s Safety FeaturesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

9

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

10/09/02 13:42:53 31TM8610_014

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

In addition, your vehicle has sidecurtain airbags to help protect theheads of the driver, front passenger,and passengers in the outer rearseating positions during a moderateto severe side or front impact (seepage for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

28

32

33

Airbags

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

10

10/09/02 13:42:59 31TM8610_015

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

To dotheir job, airbags must inflate withtremendous force. So whileairbags help save lives, they cancause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearcollisions, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

Airbags can pose hazards.

What you should do:

Your Vehicle’s Safety FeaturesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

11

10/09/02 13:43:05 31TM8610_016

－See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

Your vehicle has a door/hatch open indicator (red)

on the instrument panel to indicatewhen any door or the hatch is nottightly closed.

See page for how to lock thedoors, and page for how the door/hatch open indicator works.

Your vehicle also has a door andhatch open indicator on the multi-information display to indicate whena specific door or the hatch is nottightly closed. You will see theappropriate indicator(s) for eachcondition.

You will also hear a beep when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and each time you openany door or the hatch with the key inthe ON (II) position.

The above illustration shows that alldoors and the hatch are open.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors and thehatch are closed and locked.

38 55

68130

Introduction Close and Lock the Doors1.

Protecting Adults and Teens

12

10/09/02 13:43:14 31TM8610_017

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Your vehicle has the auto doorlocking/unlocking feature. For moreinformation, see page .

Locking the doors and the hatch alsohelps prevent an outsider fromunexpectedly opening a door or thehatch when you come to a stop.

When one or more doors or thehatch are not tightly closed, thecorresponding indicator for eachcondition will come on.

The above example shows the frontright and rear left doors, and thehatch open.

When the hatch is not tightly closed,this indicator will come on. 106

Protecting Adults and TeensD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

13

10/09/02 13:43:21 31TM8610_018

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel up and down, and inand out (see page ).

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

Once a seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

125138

Adjust the Front Seats2.


14

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

10/09/02 13:43:28 31TM8610_019

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

138

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.


riverand

Passenger

Safety

15

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

10/09/02 13:43:34 31TM8610_020

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe center of the back of your headrests against the center of therestraint.

Have passengers adjust their headrestraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints and how the driver’sand front passenger’s active headrestraints work.

139

Adjust the Head Restraints4.


16

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness, and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

10/09/02 13:43:40 31TM8610_021

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.

This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

CONTINUED

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.


riverand

Passenger

Safety

17

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

10/09/02 13:43:47 31TM8610_022

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, squeeze the two releasebuttons, and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and head restraints, andput on their seat belts, it is veryimportant that they continue to situpright, well back in their seats, withtheir feet on the floor, until thevehicle is safely parked and theengine is off.

21

Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.


18

RELEASE BUTTONS

10/09/02 13:43:55 31TM8610_023

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

Advice for Pregnant Women


riverand

Passenger

Safety

19

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

10/09/02 13:44:01 31TM8610_024

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.


A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Never let passengers ride in thecargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat.

Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Additional Safety Precautions


20

10/09/02 13:44:09 31TM8610_025

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all seating positions.The front seat belts are alsoequipped with automatic seat belttensioners.

In addition to the seat belt reminderindicator in the instrument panel,you will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGERSEAT BELT’’ message. This remainsdisplayed if you ignore it and do notfasten the seat belt while driving.

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

This system monitors the front seatbelts. If you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position before yourseat belt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened beforethe beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

The seat belt system includes anindicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ message on the multi-information display.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

CONTINUED

Seat Belt System Components Seat Belt Indicator

Additional Information About Your Seat BeltsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

21

10/09/02 13:44:17 31TM8610_026

If the indicator comes on or thebeeper sounds when the driver’s seatbelt is latched and there is no frontseat passenger and no items on thefront seat, something may beinterfering with the monitoringsystem. Look for and remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

Any object on the floor that istouching the rear of the seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat (see page ).

17

49

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Lap/Shoulder Belt

22

10/09/02 13:44:25 31TM8610_027

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in position.

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten theseat belt, pull it out only as far asneeded.

The tensioners can be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

If the tensioner is activated, the SRSindicator comes on and the tensionermust be replaced.

do not deploy


Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

23

10/09/02 13:44:32 31TM8610_028

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

Honda provides a limited warrantyon seat belts. See your

booklet fordetails.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by your dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.383

HondaWarranty Information


Seat Belt Maintenance

24

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

10/09/02 13:44:38 31TM8610_029

CONTINUED

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

25

(1)

(3)

(5)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(10)

(13)(9) (8)

(14)(2)

(16)

(4)

(15)

(16)(14)

(8)

(11)

(7)(12)

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors

(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors Control Unit/OPDS Sensors Control Unit

(13) SRS Indicator(14) Side Curtain Airbags(15) Safing Sensor(16) Side Impact Sensors (Second)

(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensor

10/09/02 13:44:44 31TM8610_030

Your Airbag System includes:

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceiling,above the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and signal the controlunit to turn the airbag off (seepage ).

Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver’s seat belt and the frontpassenger’s seat belt are latchedor unlatched (see page ).

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

28

32

33

23

32

21

30

Additional Information About Your Airbags

26

10/09/02 13:44:51 31TM8610_031

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. If the weight is about 65lbs (29 kg) or less (the weightof an infant or small child), thepassenger’s front airbag will beturned off (see page ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbag systemcomponents (see page ).

34

35

34

30

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

27

10/09/02 13:44:57 31TM8610_032

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

Only the driver’s airbag will deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will inflatethe driver’s and front passenger’sairbags, at the time and with theforce needed. 35

How Your Front Airbags Work


28

10/09/02 13:45:05 31TM8610_033

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiple-threshold frontairbags (SRS). During a frontal crashsevere enough to cause one or bothfront airbags to deploy, the airbagscan inflate at different rates,depending on the severity of thecrash, whether or not the seat beltsare latched, and/or other factors.Front airbags are designed tosupplement the seat belts to helpreduce the likelihood of head andchest injuries in frontal crashes.

CONTINUED


Dual-Stage, Multiple-ThresholdFront Airbags (SRS)

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

10/09/02 13:45:09 31TM8610_034

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Hondadoes not encourage carrying aninfant or small child in front, if thesensors detect the weight of aninfant or small child (up to about 65lbs or 29 kg), the system willautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off.

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren or small-statured adults whoride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any objects or metal itemsunder the front seats.Objects placed or pushed underthe front passenger’s seat maycause the sensor to malfunction,increasing the risk of injury in acrash.

Advanced Airbags


30

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHT SENSORSDRIVER’S SEAT POSITION SENSOR

10/09/02 13:45:19 31TM8610_035

Be aware that objects placed on thepassenger’s seat can also cause theairbag to be turned off.

When the passenger airbag getsturned off by the weight sensors, a‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator inthe center of the dashboard comeson (see page ).

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag is automatically turned off.However, the passenger airbag offindicator in this situation will notcome on.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

Moving the front seat or seat-backforcibly back against the foldedrear seat.

Back seat passengers should notwedge objects or intentionallyforce their feet under the frontpassenger seat.

35


do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

10/09/02 13:45:26 31TM8610_036

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if theposition sensors detect a child hasleaned into the side airbag’sdeployment path, the airbag will shutoff.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid acceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

How Your Side Airbags Work


Side Airbag Cutoff System

32

10/09/02 13:45:33 31TM8610_037

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or another object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

One or both side curtain airbags mayinflate in a moderate to severefrontal collision which causes thefront airbags to deploy.

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag.

34


How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

10/09/02 13:45:40 31TM8610_038

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on for several seconds thengoes off. This tells you the system isworking properly.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It doesmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on for several secondsand then go off (see page ). If itdoesn’t come on, stays on, or comeson while driving without a passengerin the front seat, have the systemchecked.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKAIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display.

You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGERSIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on themulti-information display.

The SRS indicator alerts you to apotential problem with your airbagsystem components.

If you see any of these indications,the airbag system components maynot work properly when you needthem.

65


How the SRS IndicatorWorks

How the SideAirbag OffIndicator Works

not

34

U.S. Canada

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

10/09/02 13:45:51 31TM8610_039

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less(the weight of an infant or smallchild) on the front passenger’s seat.It does there is a problemwith the airbag.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay come on and off repeatedly ifthe total weight on the seat is nearthe airbag cutoff threshold.

If an adult or teenage passenger isriding in front, move the seat as farto the rear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

Be aware that objects placed on thefront seat can cause the indicator tocome on.

If no weight is detected on the frontseat, the airbag will be automaticallyshut off. However, the indicator willnot come on.

CONTINUED


How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not mean

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

Canada

U.S.

On vehicle with navigation system On vehicle without navigation system

Canada

U.S.

10/09/02 13:46:00 31TM8610_040

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the frontpassenger’s weight sensors, thefront seat belt tensioners, and allseat belts and their anchors wornduring a crash to make sure theyare operating properly.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer assoon as possible.

If the indicator comes on with nofront seat passenger and no objectson the seat, or with an adult ridingthere, something may be interferingwith the weight sensors. Look forand remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

Any object on the floor that istouching the rear of the seat-back.


The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

An airbag ever inflates.

Airbag Service

36

10/09/02 13:46:08 31TM8610_041

If water oranother liquid soaks into a seat-back, it can prevent the side airbagcutoff system from workingproperly.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact HondaAutomobile Customer Service at(800) 999-1009 in the US, orHonda Customer Relations at 1-888-9-HONDA-9 in Canada.


Do not expose the front passenger’sseat-back to liquid.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

37

10/09/02 13:46:13 31TM8610_042

－－

－

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehiclecollisions are the number one causeof the death of children age 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state,Canadian province and territoryrequires that infants and children beproperly restrained when they ride ina vehicle.

43 5152 55

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Protecting Children General Guidelines

38

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

10/09/02 13:46:20 31TM8610_043

－

According to crash statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt. (See page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren.)

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenaged 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat. Somestates have laws restricting wherechildren may ride.

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sfront airbag off under certaincircumstances (see page ), pleasefollow these guidelines:

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

35

52

CONTINUED

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks


Small Children

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Infants

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

10/09/02 13:46:30 31TM8610_044

－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

Canadian Models

U.S. Models


40

SUN VISORS DASHBOARD

SUN VISORS

10/09/02 13:46:43 31TM8610_045

－

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visual contact,we strongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

52

18

17

138

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

Protecting Children General GuidelinesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

41

10/09/02 13:46:51 31TM8610_046

－


If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.

This can preventchildren from accidentally fallingout (see page ).

If a child wraps a looseseat belt around their neck, theycan be seriously or fatally injured.(See pages and for how toactivate and deactivate thelockable retractor.)

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates, Canadian provinces andterritories, and can be veryhazardous.

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Childrenwho play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside thevehicle. Teach your children not toplay in or around vehicles.

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the hatch, whichcan lead to accidental injury ordeath.

49 50

131


Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Use the childproof door locks toprevent children from opening therear doors.

Make sure any unused seat beltthat a child can reach is buckled,the lockable retractor is activated,and the belt is fully retracted andlocked.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Lock all doors and the hatch whenyour vehicle is not in use.

Keep vehicle keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.


42

10/09/02 13:46:58 31TM8610_047

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

It could also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

Protecting Infants and Small ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

43

10/09/02 13:47:09 31TM8610_048

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

Many states, Canadian provinces andterritories allow a child one year ofage or older who also meets theminimum size and weightrequirements to transition from arear-facing child seat to a forwardfacing seat. Know the requirementswhere you are driving and follow thechild seat instructions. Many expertsrecommend use of a rear-facing seatup to age two, if the child’s height

and weight are appropriate for arear-facing seat.

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

Child Seat Placement

Protecting Infants and Small Children

44

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acrash.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

10/09/02 13:47:18 31TM8610_049

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two outerseating positions in the back seat.

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren (LATCH) system.

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Even with advanced front airbagsthat automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

Look for FMVSS 213 or CMVSS213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

35

Selecting a Child Seat

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meetFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213 or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

1.

2.

3.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

10/09/02 13:47:27 31TM8610_050

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-sidemovement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for a rear-facing child seat.

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

Installing a Child Seat

Secure the child in the child seat.

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

1.

3.

2.

46

10/09/02 13:47:32 31TM8610_051

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.Make sure there are no objects

near the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) at the outerrear seats.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

You can find lower anchors in theslits in the seat-backs.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH

Installing a Child SeatD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

47

BUTTON

LOWER ANCHORS Rigid type

10/09/02 13:47:42 31TM8610_052

Other LATCH-compatible seats havea flexible-type connector as shownabove.

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint and over the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

If the tether strap is too long andcannot be tightened firmly, find aroute where the strap can betightened securely.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.

6.

5.

4.

7.

139


48

ANCHOR

TETHER STRAP HOOK

Flexible type

10/09/02 13:47:50 31TM8610_053

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle and remove any slack fromthe lap portion of the belt.

1. 2.

3.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt


riverand

Passenger

Safety

49

10/09/02 13:47:58 31TM8610_054

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child seat, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat, using one of theanchorage points shown above.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

4. 5.

Installing a Child Seat with aTether


50

ANCHORAGE POINTS

ANCHOR

10/09/02 13:48:06 31TM8610_055

Attach the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap over the seat-back andthrough the head restraint legs.

If the tether strap is too long andcannot be tightened firmly, find aroute where the strap can betightened securely.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

1.

2.

3.49


riverand

Passenger

Safety

51

ANCHORANCHOR

Outer Position Center PositionTETHER STRAP HOOK TETHER STRAP HOOK

10/09/02 13:48:13 31TM8610_056

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear the lap/shoulder belt.

1.

2.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger Children

52

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

10/09/02 13:48:20 31TM8610_057

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible, and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

Some states, Canadian provinces andterritories also require children touse a booster seat until they reach agiven age or weight (e.g., 6 years or60 lbs). Be sure to check currentlaws in the states, provinces or

territories where you intend to drive.3.

4.

5.45

Using a Booster Seat

Protecting Larger ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

53

10/09/02 13:48:28 31TM8610_058

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

17 52

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

Physical Size

Maturity

Protecting Larger Children

54

10/09/02 13:48:38 31TM8610_059

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.


Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.

Protecting Larger ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

55

10/09/02 13:48:43 31TM8610_060

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in a crash thatmay have damaged the underside.

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Set the fan speed to high.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

With the hatch open, airflow can pullexhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thehatch open, open all the windows,and set the climate control system asshown below.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the climatecontrol system as follows:

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

56

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

10/09/02 13:48:51 31TM8610_061

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury or death. Read these labelscarefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which may beremoved by the owner), contact yourdealer for a replacement.

CONTINUED

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

Safety LabelsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

57

DASHBOARD

RADIATOR CAP

SUN VISORS

10/09/02 13:49:06 31TM8610_062

U.S. models Canadian models

Safety Labels

58

DOORJAMBS

10/09/02 13:49:13 31TM8610_063

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 60............................Instrument Panel . 61

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 62.............................................Gauges . 72

.............Multi-Information Display . 75Controls Near the Steering

.........................................Wheel . 116Windshield Wipers and

.....................................Washers . 117.......Turn Signals and Headlights . 118

.........Daytime Running Lights . 120......Instrument Panel Brightness . 121

...............Hazard Warning Button . 122

...............Rear Window Defogger . 123...................................Econ Button . 124

......Steering Wheel Adjustments . 125.............................Keys and Locks . 126

......................Immobilizer System . 127..............................Ignition Switch . 128

....................................Door Locks . 130............Childproof Door Locks . 131

.....................Remote Transmitter . 132..............................................Hatch . 136

................Unlocking the Hatch . 137...............................................Seats . 138

...........Front Seat Adjustments . 138

Driver’s Seat Height............................Adjustment . 138

........................Head Restraints . 139.Folding the Rear Seats Down . 142

......................................Armrest . 143...........................................Mirrors . 144

..Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 144..............Power Mirror Heaters . 145

............................Power Windows . 146...............................Parking Brake . 148

.........Interior Convenience Items . 149.....................Cargo Area Cover . 150

...............Under Floor Storages . 152.Floor Storage Compartments . 152

.....................Beverage Holders . 153........Accessory Power Sockets . 153

.............Console Compartment . 154..................................Glove Box . 154

...............................Center Tray . 155..........................Center Pockets . 155

..................................Coat Hook . 156

..................................Sun Visors . 156............................Vanity Mirror . 156

...............................Interior Lights . 157

Instruments and ControlsInstrum

entsand

Controls

59

10/09/02 13:49:17 31TM8610_064

＊

＊＊

＊

If equipped:

Control Locations

60

PADDLE SHIFTERS USB ADAPTER CABLE

(P.72) (P.122)(P.72, 75)


(P.328) (P.195, 203)

HAZARD WARNING BUTTONMULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY(P.62)INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORSGAUGES

ECON BUTTON(P.124)

DOOR LOCK TAB(P.130)

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH(P.130)

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES(P.146)

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE(P.300)

AUDIO SYSTEM(P.166)NAVIGATION SYSTEM

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR(P.35)

PARKING BRAKE LEVER(P.148)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION (CVT)(P.323)

(P.160)

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

10/09/02 13:49:22 31TM8610_065

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Instrument PanelInstrum

entsand

Controls

61

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM(ABS) INDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM (SRS) INDICATOR

SYSTEM MESSAGEINDICATORBRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

(AMBER)

VSA OFF INDICATOR

MALFUNCTIONINDICATOR LAMP PARKING BRAKE AND

BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR (RED)

DOOR/HATCH OPENINDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM INDICATOR

IMA SYSTEMINDICATOR

HIGH BEAMINDICATOR

ELECTRIC POWER STEERINGINDICATOR

(P.64)

(P.63)

(P.66)

: If equipped (P.62)

(P.64)

(P.65)

(P.68)

(P.68)

(P.69)

(P.64)

(P.69)

HIGH TEMPERATURE INDICATOR (P.67)

LOW TEMPERATURE INDICATOR(P.67)

(P.70)

(P.66)

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR (P.69)

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P.69)

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR LOW TIRE PRESSURE/

TPMS INDICATOR

12 VOLT BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

(P.70)

ECON MODE INDICATOR (P.71)

(P.70)

AUTO IDLE STOP INDICATOR

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.65, 345)

(P.65, 345)

(P.62, 407)

(P.63, 416)

(P.62, 415)

(P.66, 333, 335)(P.63, 418)

10/09/02 13:49:32 31TM8610_066

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you have notfastened your seat belt.

You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ message on the multi-information display.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belt, the beeper soundsand the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belt before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals, and youwill see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT BELT’’ or‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER SEATBELT’’ message on the multi-information display. For moreinformation, see page .

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKEMISSION SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display. Formore information, see page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running, and youwill see a ‘‘CHECK ENGINE OILLEVEL’’ message on the multi-information display. For moreinformation, see page .

21

417

415

Instrument Panel Indicators

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Low Oil PressureIndicator

62

10/09/02 13:49:41 31TM8610_067

If it stays on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, it canindicate a problem in the brakesystem. You will also see a‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ or‘‘CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. For more information, seepage .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly codedignition key. If it is not a properlycoded key, the indicator will blink,and the engine’s fuel system will bedisabled (see page ).

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the 12 volt batteryis not being charged, and you willalso see a ‘‘CHECK CHARGINGSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. Driving withthe parking brake not fullyreleased can damage the brakesand tires.

If you drive without releasing theparking brake, a beeper will sound,and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASEPARKING BRAKE’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

1.

2.

126

416

418

148


Immobilizer SystemIndicator

12 Volt Battery ChargingSystem Indicator

Parking Brake andBrake SystemIndicator (Red)

Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

U.S. Canada

10/09/02 13:49:48 31TM8610_068

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, and START (III) position.When the brake system indicator(amber) comes on and stays on,there is a problem with the CreepAid System or Brake Assist (thenormal brake operates properly).Have your vehicle checked by yourdealer. For more information, seepage .

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKESYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem with theABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis indicator on, your vehicle stillhas normal braking ability but noanti-lock function. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates apotential problem with your frontairbags. This indicator will also alertyou to a potential problem with yourairbag system components. Formore information, see page .

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABSSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKAIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

89

337

339

89

34

89


Brake SystemIndicator(Amber)

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

64

U.S. Canada

10/09/02 13:49:57 31TM8610_069

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehicle stabilityassist (VSA) system.

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates that thepassenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off. You will alsosee a ‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAGOFF’’ message on the multi-information display. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. For more information, seepage .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, there is a problem withthe VSA system. You will also see a‘‘CHECK VSA SYSTEM’’ messageon the multi-information display.Take your vehicle to a dealer to haveit checked. Without VSA, yourvehicle still has normal driving ability,but will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement. For moreinformation, see page .

34

345

345

345


Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System IndicatorSide Airbag Off

Indicator

VSA OFF Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

65

U.S. Canada

10/09/02 13:50:07 31TM8610_070

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost pressure, and determine thecause. If it is because of a flat tire,replace the flat tire with the compactspare (see page ), and have theflat tire repaired as soon as possible.If two or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service.Refer to page for moreinformation.

If this indicator begins to flash,there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system(TPMS). You will also see a‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. The indicator continues toflash for a while (approximately 1minute), then stays on. If thishappens, have your dealer checkthe system as soon as possible.For more information, see page

.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, it indicates a problem in theintegrated motor assist (IMA)system. With the IMA indicator on,the vehicle may not accelerate as itnormally does. Have the vehiclechecked by the dealer as soon aspossible.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK IMASYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display.

See pages and .

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIREPRESSURE’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

If it comes on while driving, itindicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are significantly lowon pressure.

This indicator has two functions:

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

1.

2.

333 335

401

426

342

341

U.S. models only


Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

IMA System Indicator

Auto Idle Stop Indicator

66

10/09/02 13:50:19 31TM8610_071

If the indicator begins to blink orstays on, you will also see a ‘‘WATERTEMP HOT’’ message on the multi-information display. This warningwill alert you that the engine shouldbe cooled down.

This indicator shows thetemperature of the engine coolant. Itnormally comes on when you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position and goes off after a fewseconds. In normal drivingconditions, this indicator should notblink or stay on. In severe drivingconditions, such as very hot weatheror a long period of uphill driving, thisindicator may blink. This means theengine coolant temperature is high.If the indicator begins to blink whileyou are driving, be sure to slow downto prevent overheating. If theindicator stays on, pull safely to theside of the road and turn off theengine. See page for instructionsand precautions on checking theengine’s cooling system.

Do not drive the vehicle while theindicator is on or the engine may bedamaged.

This indicator shows thetemperature of the engine coolant. Ifthere is no problem, this indicatorcomes on when the engine is cold. Ifit comes on when the engine is warm(normal operating temperature),have the vehicle inspected by yourdealer as soon as possible.

412


High TemperatureIndicator

Low TemperatureIndicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

10/09/02 13:50:25 31TM8610_072

This indicator normally comes onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position and goes offafter the engine starts. If it comes onat any other time, there is a problemin the electric power steering system.

If this happens, stop the vehicle in asafe place and turn off the engine.Reset the system by restarting theengine. The indicator will stay on,but should go off after driving ashort distance. If it does not go off,or comes back on again while driving,take the vehicle to your dealer tohave it checked. With the indicatoron, the EPS may be turned off,making the vehicle harder to steer.

If you turn the steering wheel to thefull left or right position repeatedlywhile stopping or driving at very lowspeed, you may feel slightly hardersteering in order to prevent damageto the steering system caused byoverheating. This may also happen ifyou hold the steering wheel on thefull left or right position for a while.

This indicator comes on red if anydoor or the hatch lid is not closedtightly.

You will also see a correspondingindicator(s) on the multi-informationdisplay to indicate which door and/or the hatch is not closed tightly (seepage ).You will also see a ‘‘CHECK POWER

STEERING SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display.

12

Electric Power Steering(EPS) Indicator

Door/Hatch OpenIndicator


68

10/09/02 13:50:32 31TM8610_073

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will remain on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door.

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator also comes on withreduced brightness when thedaytime running lights (DRL) are on(see page ).

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see pages and ).Replace the bulb as soon as possible,since other drivers cannot see thatyou are signaling.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsand all turn signals on the outside ofthe vehicle flash.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel (see page ).

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

119

120

377 379

268

268

On LX and EX models

On LX and EX models

Cruise Main IndicatorLights On Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Cruise Control Indicator

Instrument Panel IndicatorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

69

10/09/02 13:50:43 31TM8610_074

This indicator is in the fuel gauge. Itcomes on as a reminder that youmust refuel soon. You will also see a‘‘FUEL LOW’’ message on the multi-information display.

When the needle reaches E, there isa very small amount of fuel in thetank.

This indicator comes on when thereis a system message on the multi-information display. Press the INFObutton on the steering wheel (seepage ) to see the message (seepage ).

Most of the time, this indicatorcomes on along with other indicatorsin the instrument panel such as theseat belt reminder indicator, SRSindicator, VSA system indicator, etc.

When the indicator comes on, thereare about 1.8 U.S. gal (6.9 ) of fuelremaining in the tank.

This indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. For moreinformation, see page .

7689

267

On LX and EX modelsLow Fuel Indicator System Message

IndicatorSecurity System Indicator


70

LOW FUEL INDICATORSECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

10/09/02 13:50:52 31TM8610_075

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. When you turn the econmode on by pressing the ECONbutton with the ignition switch in theON (II) position, this indicator willcome on.

You will also see the symbol on themulti-information display with ECONON or ECON OFF (see page ).75

ECON Mode Indicator

Instrument Panel IndicatorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

71

10/09/02 13:50:56 31TM8610_076

This shows your speed in kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles per hour(mph) depending on the selectedspeedometer display. You can switchthe display between km/h and mph(see page ).

The speedometer also has anambient meter. The color of theambient meter changesautomatically according to yourdriving style (see page ).

You can customize the setting of theambient meter (see page ).

73

103

318

Gauges

Speedometer/Ambient Meter

72

U.S. model is shown.

MULTI-INFORMATIONDISPLAY

SPEEDOMETER/AMBIENT METER

CHARGE/ASSIST GAUGE TACHOMETER FUEL GAUGE

KM/MILE CHANGE KNOB SEL/RESET KNOB

10/09/02 13:51:02 31TM8610_077

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

To switch the lower segment of themulti-information display betweenthe odometer with the outsidetemperature and trip meter with theoutside temperature, press the sel/reset knob repeatedly. For moreinformation, see page .

Each time you press and hold thekm/mile change knob, thespeedometer reading switchesbetween miles per hour (mph) andkilometers per hour (km/h).

78

Fuel GaugeSel/Reset Knob Km/Mile Change Knob

GaugesInstrum

entsand

Controls

73

SEL/RESET KNOB KM/MILE CHANGE KNOB

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

10/09/02 13:51:10 31TM8610_078

This gauge shows you the charge/discharge status of the IntegratedMotor Assist (IMA). When the IMAis assisting the engine, the pointerstays in the assist gauge (upper partof the gauge). When the IMAbattery is being charged, the pointerstays in the charge gauge (lower partof the gauge).

You can also check the status of theIMA system function on the multi-information display (see page ).

If the IMA battery is too hot or toocold, the IMA system limits the IMAbattery’s output power to protect thebattery. This disables the IMA assistand auto idle stop, even though thebattery level indicator on the multi-information display may show thatthe battery is well-charged (see page

). Therefore, if the motor assistis frequently used, the batterybecomes hot and starts to limit itsoutput power.

It takes a short time to normalize theIMA battery’s output powerdepending on the weather.

84

85

Charge/Assist Gauge

Gauges

74

IMA ASSIST GAUGE

IMA CHARGE GAUGE

10/09/02 13:51:15 31TM8610_079

The multi-information display in theinstrument panel displays variousinformation and messages when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position. Some of the messages helpyou operate your vehicle morecomfortably. Others help to keepyou aware of the periodicmaintenance your vehicle needs forcontinued trouble-free driving.

If you do not fasten your seat belt,you will see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ message on the multi-information display when you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position.

These messages go off severalseconds after the key is inserted intothe ignition switch.

There are three types of messages:normal display messages, engine oillife and maintenance messages, andsystem messages.

You can select the displayedlanguage and also customize somevehicle control settings to your likingwith the multi-information displayand the three buttons on the steeringwheel (see page ).

You will see an ‘‘ECON ON’’ or‘‘ECON OFF’’ message on the multi-information display according to theprevious ECON setting when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position (see page ).

76

124

CONTINUED

Normal Display Messages

Multi-Information DisplayInstrum

entsand

Controls

75

ECON is On. ECON is Off.

10/09/02 13:51:23 31TM8610_080

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

The multi-information displaychanges to the blank display shownabove several seconds after you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position.

With the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the multi-informationdisplay changes as shown on page

each time you press the INFO( / ) button or SEL/RESETbutton.

78

Multi-Information Display

76


SEL/RESET BUTTON

INFO ( / ) BUTTONSEL/RESET BUTTON

INFO BUTTONS ( / )

LX and EX models DX model

10/09/02 13:51:29 31TM8610_081

In the normal display mode, theupper and middle segments displaytrip computer information, such asfuel economy or average speed. Thelower segment displays theodometer/trip meter (A/B), outsidetemperature, and engine oil life andmaintenance item code(s).

In the multi-information display, thesystem message is also displayed(see page ) and you cancustomize your vehicle controlsettings (see page ).

The multi-information displayconsists of an upper segment, amiddle segment and a lowersegment.

88

91

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

77

MIDDLESEGMENT


LOWERSEGMENT

UPPERSEGMENT

10/09/02 13:51:34 31TM8610_082

＊

▼▲

＊


78


: This display will be shown when theBluetooth HandsFreeLink is activated.

IMA System PowerFlow Monitor/IMA Battery LevelIndicator(See page 84/85)

: Press the INFO button .


: Press the SEL/RESET button.

HFL (See page 87)

Average FuelEconomy Record(See page 81)

Engine Oil Life(See page 80)

Outside Temperature(See page 80)

Trip Computer (See page 81)

Eco GuideFeedbackMonitor(See page 81)

10/09/02 13:51:41 31TM8610_083

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincial/territorial regulations to disconnect,reset, or alter the odometer with theintent to change the number of milesor kilometers indicated.

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it. Thereare two trip meters: Trip A and TripB. Each trip meter worksindependently, so you can keep trackof two different distances.

When you reset Trip A, average fueleconomy A is reset at the same time.When you reset Trip B, average fueleconomy B is reset.

In the customizing mode, you can setTrip A and average fuel economy Ato reset when you refuel your vehicle(see page ).

To reset a trip meter, display it, thenpress and hold the SEL/RESETbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0’’.

99

Odometer Trip Meter


entsand

Controls

79

TRIP METER A TRIP METER B

ODOMETER U.S. model is shown.

U.S. CANADA

10/09/02 13:51:50 31TM8610_084

This shows the outside Fahrenheittemperature in U.S. models, andCelsius temperature in Canadianmodels.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

You can adjust the outsidetemperature display (see page ).

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. The temperaturereading can be affected by heatreflection from the road surface,engine heat, and the exhaust fromsurrounding traffic. This can causean incorrect temperature readingwhen your vehicle speed is under19 mph (30 km/h). When you startyour trip, the sensor is not fullyacclimatized, therefore it may takeseveral minutes until the propertemperature is displayed.

This shows the remaining engine oillife. It shows 100% after the engineoil is replaced and the display is reset.The engine oil life is calculatedbased on engine operating conditions.For more information, see page .

98351

Outside Temperature Engine Oil Life


80

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE

ENGINE OIL LIFE

U.S. CANADA

10/09/02 13:51:58 31TM8610_085

Eco guide feedback monitor consistsof three parts. The eco-drive scoredisplay shows the accumulated ecoscore for one driving cycle. Theacceleration monitor showsacceleration efficiency. Thedeceleration monitor showsdeceleration efficiency. See page

for more information.

The average fuel economy recordsdisplay shows the average fueleconomy (0) for the current drivingcycle and (1-3) for the last threedriving cycles in mpg (U.S. models)or l/100 km (Canadian models).

Indicators in the trip computer show:

Average Fuel Economy

RangeElapsed TimeAverage Vehicle Speed

Instant Fuel Economy

317

CONTINUED

Eco Guide Feedback Monitor Average Fuel Economy Records Trip Computer


entsand

Controls

81


DECELERATIONMONITOR

ACCELERATIONMONITOR

LATESTAVERAGE FUELECONOMY

PAST AVERAGEFUEL ECONOMY

ECO-DRIVE SCORE DISPLAYU.S. CANADA

10/09/02 13:52:09 31TM8610_086

Mile indication (U.S. models)

Kilometer indication (Canadian models)

Average Fuel Economy A

Average Fuel Economy B

: This shows your vehicle’s instantfuel economy in mpg.

: This shows your vehicle’s averagefuel economy in mpg (U.S. models)or liter/100 km (Canadian models)since you last reset trip computer A.

: This shows your vehicle’s averagefuel economy in mpg (U.S. models)or liter/100 km (Canadian models)since you last reset trip computer B.

You can customize the Trip A andAverage Fuel Economy A resetcondition on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ).

: This shows your vehicle’s instantfuel economy in L/100 km.

When you turn off the engine, theinstant fuel economy (mpg or L/100km) is also reset.

The average fuel economy will bereset when you reset the trip meter,or if the vehicle’s 12 volt battery goesdead or is disconnected.

99

Average Fuel Economy A/BInstant Fuel Economy


82

U.S.

CANADA

AVERAGE FUELECONOMY A

AVERAGE FUELECONOMY B

CANADAU.S.

INSTANTFUELECONOMY

10/09/02 13:52:21 31TM8610_087

This shows the average speed youare traveling in miles per hour (mph)for U.S. models or kilometers perhour (km/h) for Canadian models.

This shows the accumulatedtraveling time since you last reset it.When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, ELAPSEDTIME is reset.

This shows the estimated distanceyou can travel on the fuel remainingin the fuel tank. This distance isestimated from the fuel economyyou received over the last severalmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada),so it will vary with changes in speed,traffic, etc.

If you want to reset the ELAPSEDTIME manually, go to the tripcomputer’s ELAPSED TIME display,and press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton until the number resets.

You can customize the ELAPSEDTIME reset conditions on the multi-information display (see page ).

To reset the AVG. SPEED reading,press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton until the number resets.

100

ELAPSED TIMERANGE AVG. SPEED


entsand

Controls

83

10/09/02 13:52:28 31TM8610_088

The IMA system power flow monitorshows the status of the IMA system.The energy source, and poweringstatus of the engine and IMA motor(engine operation icon and IMAbattery) are represented by arrowson the display The battery levelindicator shows the state of chargeof the IMA battery.

The table in the next column showsthe basic monitoring displayexamples and their descriptions.

ExampleDescriptionsOnly IMA motor ispowering the vehicle andIMA battery is discharging.

IMA motor is assisting theengine with powering thevehicle. IMA battery isdischarging and the systemis consuming fuel.IMA system is chargingIMA battery.

Only engine is poweringvehicle. The system isconsuming fuel.

Engine is powering vehicleand IMA system is chargingIMA battery. The system isconsuming fuel.

IMA System Power Flow Monitor Powering Status


84

IMA BATTERY/BATTERYLEVEL INDICATOR

POWER FLOW

ENGINEOPERATIONICON

10/09/02 13:52:37 31TM8610_089

The IMA battery level indicatorshows you the state of charge of thebattery for the Integrated MotorAssist (IMA). This battery isrecharged and discharged by theIMA motor depending on the drivingconditions.

The position of the battery levelreading shows the state of charge ofthe IMA battery. When the batterylevel reading is high, the IMAbattery is well charged. There areseven positions (Level 0-Level 6) ofthe battery level reading.

The battery level reading may dropnear the bottom under drivingconditions that require IMA motorassistance for a long time, such asprolonged acceleration or climbing along hill.

The IMA motor will recharge thebattery as you continue driving.

CONTINUED

IMA Battery Level Indicator


entsand

Controls

85

LEVEL READING

Lowestlevel ofstate ofcharge

Highestlevel ofstate ofcharge

IMA BATTERY LEVEL INDICATOR

Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6

10/09/02 13:52:45 31TM8610_090

On vehicle with paddle shifters

On vehicle without paddle shifters

The IMA battery is charged at ahigher rate when the transmission isin L (Low) mode (see page ).

The battery level gauge does notread the battery level directly. Itcalculates the level by continuouslymeasuring the current flow, voltage,and temperature.

If the battery is mostly discharged,the auto idle stop function is disabled(see page ).

The IMA battery is charged at ahigher rate when the transmission isin LOW (L) range (see page ).

Since the level is not read directly,small sensing errors can, over time,cause the gauge to read higher thanthe actual battery level. The systemwill then perform a correction, andthe battery level gauge reading willdrop suddenly. When this happens,IMA assist and Auto Idle Stop aredisabled until the IMA battery issufficiently recharged by normaldriving.

This correction of the battery levelgauge is normal and does notindicate a problem. If the IMAbattery develops a problem orbecomes deteriorated, the IMAsystem indicator will come on. If thishappens, have the vehicle checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

332

326

333


86

10/09/02 13:52:53 31TM8610_091

To use the system, your cell phoneand the HFL system must be linked.Not all cell phones are compatiblewith this system. Refer to page

for instructions on how to linkyour cell phone to HFL and how toreceive or make phone calls, or visitthe handsfreelink.com website. InCanada, visit , orcall (888) 528-7876.

You can receive or make phone callsfrom your cell phone through yourvehicle’s HandsFreeLink(HFL) system without touching yourcell phone.

271

www.handsfreelink.ca

Bluetooth

On models with navigation system

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink


entsand

Controls

87

10/09/02 13:52:58 31TM8610_092

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

▲ ▼If there is a problem with yourvehicle, for example the engine oillevel is low or a door is not fullyclosed, the multi-information displaywill show you the problem. It doesthis by interrupting the currentdisplay with one or more messages.

The system message(s) triggers theappropriate indicator(s) on theinstrument panel, including thesystem message indicator, to comeon. The system message indicatordoes not go off until the problem(s)is corrected.

You will also hear a beep when thesystem message comes on for thefirst time.

Most of the messages are displayedfor about 5 seconds, and then thenormal display returns. If there areseveral system messages to beshown, the display switches thesemessages every 5 seconds.

To switch the message(s) before 5seconds have elapsed, press theINFO ( / ) button on the steeringwheel.

Even if you press the INFO ( / )button, some messages stay on orcome on again at regular intervalsuntil the problem is corrected.

If the system message indicatorremains lit on the instrument panel,you can see the correspondingmessage(s) again by pressing theINFO ( / ) button repeatedly.

Here is a list of all messages:

System Messages


88

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR

10/09/02 13:53:06 31TM8610_093

CONTINUED

See page12

See page13

See page13

See page21

See page21

See page34

See page34

See page148

See page371

See page64

See page418

See page417

See page416

See page339

See page415

See page66


entsand

Controls

89

U.S.

U.S.

Canada

Canada

10/09/02 13:53:20 31TM8610_094

See page70

See page68

See page80

See page128

See page128

See page129

See page120

See page345

See page341

See page342

See page413

See page323

See page369

See page352

See page353

See page354

See page299


90

U.S.only

U.S.only

Canadaonly

10/09/02 13:53:34 31TM8610_095

▲ ▼

You can customize some vehiclecontrol settings. To enter thecustomizing mode, press and holdeither INFO button ( / ) for morethan 3 seconds. To change thesettings, the ignition switch must bein the ON (II) position, and thevehicle must be stopped with thetransmission in Park.

If you turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)position, or move the shift lever outof Park, the display will change tothe normal screen.

If you try to enter the customizingmode while the vehicle is moving,you will see a ‘‘MUST STOP ANDSHIFT TO PARK TO CHANGESETTINGS’’ message and youcannot change the settings.

If you want to change any vehiclecontrol settings, select CHGSETTING, then press the SEL/RESET button.

Refer to the table on the followingpages about the settings you want tocustomize.

CONTINUED

Customized Settings


entsand

Controls

91

10/09/02 13:53:41 31TM8610_096

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

－～± ～

－～± ～

＊

DescriptionGroup Setup Menu Item PageSetting OptionChanges the language used in the display.

Changes the outside temperature reading above orbelow its current reading.

Causes trip meter A and the average fuel economyto reset when you refuel.Resets the elapsed time of your current trip.

Changes the displayed measurement on the multi-information display.

Turn the ambient meter feature on or off.

Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lightsstay on after you close the doors.

METER SETUP(P.96)

LIGHTING SETUP(P.104)

LANGUAGE SELECTION

ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAY

TRIP A RESET withREFUELELAPSED TIME RESET

DISPLAY KM/MILES

METER COLOR CHANGE

INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME

97

98

99

100

101

103

105

TRIP B

15 sec

ENGLISHFRENCHSPANISH

5°F 0°F 5°F(U.S.)

3°C 0°C 3°C(Canada)ONOFFIGN OFFTRIP AAUTOKMMILESONOFF60 sec30 sec

Default setting:


92

10/09/02 13:53:47 31TM8610_097

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Description Setting OptionGroup Setup PageMenu ItemChanges when the doors automatically lock.

Changes when the doors automatically unlock.

Changes which doors unlock with the remotetransmitter in a first push.The exterior lights flash each time you press theLOCK or UNLOCK button. A beeper will alsosound when you press the LOCK button twice.Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for thedoors to relock and the security system to set afteryou unlock but do not open the door.Set/Cancel all the customized settings as default.

SHIFT FROM PWITH VEH SPDOFF

IGN OFFOFFDRIVER DOORALL DOORSONOFF

90 sec60 sec30 secSETCANCEL

DOOR SETUP(P.106)

DEFAULT ALL(P.115)

107

108

110

112

113

115

AUTO DOOR LOCK

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

DOOR LOCK MODE

KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGMENT

SECURITY RELOCKTIMER

Default setting:

SHIFT TO P DRIVER DOOR /ALL DOORS


entsand

Controls

93

10/09/02 13:53:52 31TM8610_098

▲ ▼

▲▼

▲ ▼

You can customize some of thevehicle control settings to yourpreference. Here are the settingsyou can customize:

METER SETUP

When you want to change thevehicle control settings, press theINFO ( / ) button to select CHGSETTING, then press the SEL/RESET button.

Each time you press the INFO ( /) button, the screen changes as

shown on the next page. Press theINFO ( / ) button until you seethe setup you want to customize,then press the SEL/RESET buttonto enter your selection.

If you do not make any changes,select ‘‘EXIT.’’ The display returns tothe normal display.

You can also use the select/resetknob in the instrument panel. Turnthe knob to select a setting and pressit to enter your selection.

If you want the settings as they werewhen the vehicle left the factory,select DEFAULT ALL, as describedon page .

LIGHTING SETUPDOOR SETUP

115

Customize Settings


94

10/09/02 13:54:01 31TM8610_099

▼▲

▲ ▼


entsand

Controls

95

NORMAL DISPLAY

CANADA

U.S.

METER SETUPSee page 96

LIGHTING SETUPSee page 104

DOOR SETUPSee page 106




: Press and hold the INFO ( / ) button.

10/09/02 13:54:08 31TM8610_100

▲▼

▲ ▼

▼▲

LANGUAGE SELECTIONADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAY

Here are the four custom settingsfor the meter setup:

TRIP A RESET with REFUEL


shown in the illustration. Press theINFO ( / ) button until you seethe setting you want to customize,then press the SEL/RESET buttonto enter your selection.

While ‘‘METER SETUP’’ is shown,press the SEL/RESET button toenter the customize mode.

METER COLOR CHANGEDISPLAY KM/MILESELAPSED TIME RESET

Meter Setup


96




See page 103 See page 101

See page 97 See page 98 See page 99 See page100

10/09/02 13:54:19 31TM8610_101

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

Language Selection

There are three language selectionsyou can make: English, French, andSpanish. To choose the language youwant, follow these instructions:

You can choose this item tocustomize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’by pressing the INFO ( / ) buttonrepeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button to seethe selections.

Select the desired language bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then enter your selection by pressingthe SEL/RESET button.

When your selection is successfullycompleted, the display changes asshown above, and then goes back tothe customize item screen.

If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION’’ andrepeat the procedure again.

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

97

10/09/02 13:54:27 31TM8610_102

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

If you sometimes find that thetemperature reading is a fewdegrees above or below the actualtemperature, you can adjust it byfollowing these instructions:

Adjust the outside temperature valueby pressing the INFO ( / ) buttonrepeatedly. Press the SEL/RESETbutton to set the desired value.


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAY’’ and repeat the procedureagain.

You can choose this item tocustomize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’by pressing the INFO ( / ) buttonrepeatedly.Press the SEL/RESET button toenter the setting.


98

Canadian models Canadian modelsU.S. modelsU.S. models

10/09/02 13:54:36 31TM8610_103

▲ ▼

▲ ▼


Select ON or OFF by pressing theINFO ( / ) button, then enteryour selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.


To cause Trip A and average fuel fortrip A to reset every time you refuelyour vehicle, follow theseinstructions:


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to ‘‘TRIPA RESET with REFUEL’’ and repeatthe procedure again.

Trip A Reset With Refuel

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

99

10/09/02 13:54:46 31TM8610_104

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

－

－

－

Elapsed Time Reset



Select the desired setting bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then enter your selection by pressingthe SEL/RESET button.

There are three elapsed time resetchoices you can make:

IGN OFF The elapsed time isreset when you turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position.

TRIP A The elapsed time is resetwhen Trip A is reset.

TRIP B The elapsed time is resetwhen Trip B is reset.


100

10/09/02 13:54:53 31TM8610_105

▲ ▼


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘ELAPSED TIME RESET’’ andrepeat the procedure again.

To change the displayedmeasurement in the trip computerand trip information and to switchbetween kilometers and miles, followthese instructions:


CONTINUED


Display Km/Miles

Instruments

andC

ontrols

101

10/09/02 13:55:00 31TM8610_106

▲ ▼


Select AUTO, KM, or MILES bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then enter your selection by pressingthe SEL/RESET button.

AUTO: When you press the km/milechange knob in the instrument panelto switch the speedometer readingbetween miles per hour (mph) andkilometers per hour (km/h), thedisplayed measurement in the tripcomputer and trip information, alsoswitches to kilometers or milesdepending on the selectedspeedometer reading.

KM: The displayed measurement inthe trip computer and tripinformation is set to kilometers.

MILES: The displayed measurementin the trip computer and tripinformation is set to miles.


If the ‘‘DISPLAY KM/MILESSETTING INCOMPLETE’’ messageappears, go back to ‘‘DISPLAY KM/MILES’’ and repeat the procedureagain.


102

10/09/02 13:55:06 31TM8610_107

▲ ▼▲ ▼

You can turn the ambient meterfeature on or off (see page ).





If the ‘‘METER COLOR CHANGESETTING INCOMPLETE’’ messageappears, go back to ‘‘METERCOLOR CHANGE’’ and repeat theprocedure again.

72

Meter Color Change


entsand

Controls

103

10/09/02 13:55:14 31TM8610_108

▲▼

▲ ▼

▼▲

There is one custom setting for thelighting setup:

INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME

While ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ isshown, press the SEL/RESETbutton to enter the customize mode.



Lighting Setup


104




See page105

10/09/02 13:55:21 31TM8610_109

▲▼

▲ ▼

Interior Light Dimming Time



If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMINGTIME’’ and repeat the procedureagain.

The interior lights fade out when youclose all doors. To change how longthe lights stay on before they fadeout, follow these instructions:

You can choose this item tocustomize from ‘‘LIGHTINGSETUP’’ by pressing the INFO ( /

) button repeatedly.

Select the desired setting (15 sec, 30sec, or 60 sec) by pressing the INFO( / ) button, then enter yourselection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.


entsand

Controls

105

10/09/02 13:55:29 31TM8610_110

▲▼

▲ ▼

▲▼

AUTO DOOR LOCK

Here are the five custom settings forthe door setup:

While ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ is shown,press the SEL/RESET button toenter the customize mode.



KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGMENTSECURITY RELOCK TIMER

AUTO DOOR UNLOCKDOOR LOCK MODE

Door Setup


106




See page107

See page108

See page113

See page112

See page110

10/09/02 13:55:39 31TM8610_111

－

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

－

－

Auto Door LockThere are three settings you canchoose from:

SHIFT FROM PThe doors lock whenever you movethe shift lever out of Park.


You can choose this item tocustomize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ bypressing the INFO ( / ) buttonrepeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button toenter the selecting mode.

WITH VEHICLE SPEEDThe doors lock when the vehiclespeed reaches about 10 mph (about16 km/h).

OFFThe auto door lock mode isdeactivated all the time.

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

107

A/T model is shown.

10/09/02 13:55:47 31TM8610_112

－

－


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTODOOR LOCK’’ and repeat theprocedure again.

There are five possible settings youcan choose from:

DRIVER DOOR WITH SHIFT TO PThe driver’s door unlocks when

you move the shift lever to Park withthe brake pedal depressed.

ALL DOORS WITH SHIFT TO PAll the doors unlock when you movethe shift lever to Park with the brakepedal depressed.

Auto Door Unlock


108

10/09/02 13:55:54 31TM8610_113

－

－

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

－

DRIVER DOOR WITH IGN OFFThe driver’s door unlocks when youturn the ignition switch to the LOCK(0) position.

ALL DOORS WITH IGN OFF Allthe doors unlock when you turn theignition switch to the LOCK (0)position.



Select the desired setting bypressing the INFO ( / ) button.

For example, you choose ‘‘DRIVERDOOR with SHIFT to P,’’ you willsee the above display.

OFF The auto door unlock isdeactivated all the time.

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

109

10/09/02 13:56:01 31TM8610_114

▲ ▼

Press the SEL/RESET button toenter your selection.


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTODOOR UNLOCK’’ and repeat theprocedure again.

To select whether the driver’s doorunlocks or all the doors unlock whenyou unlock the doors with theremote transmitter or the key, followthese instructions.


If you choose ‘‘ALL DOORS WithIGN OFF,’’ you will see the abovedisplay.

Door Lock Mode


110

10/09/02 13:56:09 31TM8610_115

▲ ▼




If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to ‘‘DOORLOCK MODE’’ and repeat theprocedure again.


entsand

Controls

111

10/09/02 13:56:14 31TM8610_116

▲ ▼

▲ ▼




When you push the LOCK button onthe remote transmitter, someexterior lights flash, and a beepersounds when you push the LOCKbutton again within 5 seconds toverify that the doors and the hatchare locked and the security systemhas set (see page ). You cancustomize the exterior lights not toflash and the beeper not to sound.

267

Keyless Lock Acknowledgment


112

10/09/02 13:56:20 31TM8610_117

▲ ▼

Security Relock Timer

You can change this relock timefrom 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ and repeatthe procedure again.


If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openany of the doors within 30 seconds,the doors and the hatch,automatically relock, and thesecurity system sets.

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

113

10/09/02 13:56:28 31TM8610_118

▲ ▼

If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ andrepeat the procedure again.





114

10/09/02 13:56:33 31TM8610_119

▲ ▼ ▲ ▼If you want to set the default settings,press the INFO ( / ) button toselect DEFAULT ALL, then pressthe SEL/RESET button.

If you want to cancel DEFAULTALL, select CANCEL, then press theSEL/RESET button. The screengoes back to the previous display.

To set the default settings, press theINFO ( / ) button to select SETthen press the SEL/RESET button.

When DEFAULT ALL is set, you willsee the above display for severalseconds, then the screen returns tothe default all setting display.

If the setting is not successfullycompleted, ‘‘FAILED’’ is shown forseveral seconds, and then the screengoes back to SET UP. Repeat thesame procedure to select DEFAULTALL.

DEFAULT ALL


entsand

Controls

115

10/09/02 13:56:40 31TM8610_120

＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.

Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.If equipped

1 :2 :3 :

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

116

(P.121)

(P.263)

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENTS(P.125)

HORN


HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS(P.118)

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) OFFSWITCH

BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE LINKSYSTEM VOICE CONTROLBUTTONS

(P.346)

(P.271)

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRROR

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK(P.264)

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET(P.153)

MULTI-INFORMATIONBUTTONS (P.76)

(P.123/145)

CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONSMULTI-INFORMATION BUTTONS

(P.268)(P.76)

(P.117)

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS

NAVIGATION SYSTEM /AUDIO SYSTEM(P.166)

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROL BUTTONS

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICECONTROL BUTTONS(P.271)

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

3

2

2

3

10/09/02 13:56:48 31TM8610_121

－

－

－

－

－

－－－

－

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

Pull thewiper control lever toward you, andhold it. The washers spray until yourelease the lever. The wipers run atlow speed, then complete one moresweep after you release the lever.

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

The length of the wipeinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to vehicle’s speed.

Vary the delay by turning theadjustment ring. If you turn it to theshortest delay ( position), thewipers change to low speedoperation when the vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

The length of the wiper interval isvaried automatically according to thevehicle’s speed.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

EX models

MIST

OFF

LO

HI

Windshield Washer

INT

Windshield Wipers and WashersInstrum

entsand

Controls

117

ADJUSTMENT RING

EX model is shown.

10/09/02 13:56:56 31TM8610_122

Turn SignalOFFParking and interior lightsHeadlights onHigh BeamsFlash high beams

Rotate the switchcounterclockwise also to spray thewindow washer and turn the wiperon.

Hold past ON to activate the rearwindow wiper a few times and tospray the rear window washer.

Rotate the switch clockwise toturn the rear window wiper ON.The wiper operates every 7seconds after completing twosweeps.

When you turn the wiper switch tothe ‘‘OFF’’ position, the wiper willreturn to its parked position.

OFF

The rear window washer uses thesame fluid reservoir as the wind-shield washer.

When you shift the transmission tothe reverse position with the frontwindshield wiper activated, the rearwiper operates automatically even ifthe rear wiper switch is off.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

4.

3.

1.

2.

Rear Window Wiper and Washer Turn Signals and Headlights

Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signals and Headlights

118

10/09/02 13:57:07 31TM8610_123

－－－Push down on theleft lever to signal a left turn and upto signal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever andhold it. The lever will return to thecenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

Turning the switch tothe ‘‘ ’’ position turns on theparking lights, taillights, instrumentpanel lights, side-marker lights, andrear license plate lights.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights.

When the light switch is in the‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, thelights on indicator comes on as areminder.

This indicator stays on if you leavethe lights on and turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I) orLOCK (0) position.

If you leave the lights on with thekey removed from the ignitionswitch, you will hear a reminderchime when you open the driver’sdoor.

Push the left leverforward until you hear a click. Theblue high beam indicator will comeon (see page ). Pull the lever backto return to the low beams.

To flash the high beams, pull thelever back lightly, then release it.The high beams will stay on as longas you hold the lever back.

69

Turn Signal Headlights High Beams

Turn Signals and HeadlightsInstrum

entsand

Controls

119

10/09/02 13:57:14 31TM8610_124

With the headlight switch off or inthe position, the high beamheadlights and the high beamindicator come on with reducedbrightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRLSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display, there is aproblem with the daytime runninglight system. Take your vehicle to adealer to have it checked.

Daytime Running Lights

Headlights

120

10/09/02 13:57:19 31TM8610_125

To reduce glare at night, theinstrument panel illumination dimswhen you turn the light switch to the

or position. Turning theknob to the right until you hear atone will cancel the reducedbrightness.

The instrument panel will illuminatewith reduced brightness when youunlock and open the driver’s door.The brightness will increase slightlywhen you insert the key in theignition switch, then go to normalbrightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

The knob on the instrument panelcontrols the brightness of theinstrument panel lights. Turn theknob to adjust the brightness withthe ignition switch in the ON (II)position and the parking lights on.

When you turn the knob, the multi-information display changes tovertical bars that show you thecurrent level.

You will hear a tone when you reachthe maximum or minimumbrightness. The brightness levelgoes out about 5 seconds after youstop adjusting.

CONTINUED

Instrument Panel BrightnessInstrum

entsand

Controls

121

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESSCONTROL KNOB

BRIGHTNESS LEVEL

10/09/02 13:57:26 31TM8610_126

If you do not insert the key in theignition switch after opening thedriver’s door, the illumination turnsoff about 30 seconds after you closethe door.

If you insert the key but do not turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, the illumination turns off inabout 10 seconds.

Push the button next to the audiosystem to turn on the hazardwarning lights (four-way flashers).This causes all four outside turnsignal lights and both turn signalindicators in the instrument panel toflash. Use the hazard warning lightsif you need to park in a dangerousarea near heavy traffic, or if yourvehicle is disabled.

Hazard Warning Button

Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button

122

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

10/09/02 13:57:31 31TM8610_127

The defogger will shut itself offwithin about 10 to 30 minutesaccording to the outside temperature(over 32°F, 0°C).

Make sure all rear windows are clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

Pushing this button also turns themirror heaters on or off. For moreinformation, see page .

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of all rear windows can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe side-to-side.The rear window defogger will clear

fog, frost, and thin ice from thewindows. Push the defogger buttonto turn it on and off. The indicator inthe button comes on to show thedefogger is on. It also shuts off whenyou turn off the ignition switch. Youhave to turn the defogger on againwhen you restart the vehicle.

145

U.S. EX models and all Canadian models

Rear Window DefoggerInstrum

entsand

Controls

123

U.S. EX model is shown.

10/09/02 13:57:39 31TM8610_128

Press the ECON button to activatethe ECON mode. ECON ON will bedisplayed on the multi-informationdisplay and the ECON modeindicator will illuminate in theinstrument panel. Press the ECONbutton again to turn it off. ECONOFF will appear on the multi-information display.

The ECON button turns the ECONmode on and off. The ECON modehelps you improve your fueleconomy by modifying some vehiclefunctions. When the ECON mode ison:

In addition, when the ECON mode ison, you may get more Eco Assistpoints (see page ).

The climate control system willhave greater temperaturefluctuations

Engine performance will bedifferent

When you turn off and then restartthe engine, the ECON mode settingremains the same as previously set.

316

ECON Button

124

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAYECON BUTTON

ECON MODE INDICATOR

10/09/02 13:57:46 31TM8610_129

Move the steering wheel so itpoints toward your chest, nottoward your face. Make sure youcan see the instrument panelgauges and indicators.

Make any steering wheeladjustments before you start driving.

Pull the lever under the steeringcolumn toward you until it stops.

Push the lever forward fully tolock the steering wheel in position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

Make sure the lever is positionedsecurely at the bottom of thesteering column as shown.

1.

3.

4.

2.

Steering Wheel AdjustmentsInstrum

entsand

Controls

125

To adjust

To lockLEVER

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

10/09/02 13:57:53 31TM8610_130

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

Two ignition keys come with yourvehicle. You should keep one ofthem in a safe place, away from thevehicle, as a spare.

They fit all the locks on your vehicle.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this number if you ever have toget a lost key replaced. Use onlyHonda-approved key blanks.

Keys and Locks

126

KEYNUMBERTAG

IGNITION KEYSWITH REMOTETRANSMITTER

10/09/02 13:58:00 31TM8610_131

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle inoperable.

If you lose your key and you cannotstart the engine, contact your dealer.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come onbriefly, then go off. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position, remove the key,reinsert it, and turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keychain) is near the ignition switchwhen you insert the key.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer SystemInstrum

entsand

Controls

127

Always take the ignition key with youwhenever you leave the vehicle alone.

10/09/02 13:58:07 31TM8610_132

－－

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

If you leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the ACCESSORY (I)position and open the driver’s door,you will see a ‘‘RETURN IGNITIONSWITCH TO LOCK (0) POSITION’’message on the multi-informationdisplay and hear a reminder beeper.

If you turn the ignition key to theACCESSORY (I) position with thedriver’s door closed, you will see an‘‘ACCESSORY (I) POSITION’’message on the multi-informationdisplay to inform you of the keyposition.

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, the shift lever mustbe in Park, and you must push thekey in slightly.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

ACCESSORY (I)LOCK (0)

Ignition Switch

128

10/09/02 13:58:14 31TM8610_133

－－ Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) or theACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

You will also see a ‘‘REMOVE KEY’’message on the multi-informationdisplay.

The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

START (III)ON (II)

Ignition SwitchInstrum

entsand

Controls

129

10/09/02 13:58:18 31TM8610_134

The lock tab on any passenger’s doorlocks and unlocks that door.

When the door is unlocked, you cansee the red indicator on the lock tababove the inner door handle.

You can customize the door lock/unlock settings (see page ).

All doors and the hatch can belocked from the outside by using thekey in the driver’s door. To unlockonly the driver’s door, insert the key,turn it clockwise, and release it. Theremaining doors and the hatchunlock when you turn the key asecond time within a few seconds.

To lock all doors and the hatch, pushthe front of the master door lockswitch on the driver’s door, pull thelock tab rearward on the driver’sdoor, or use the key on the outsidelock on the driver’s door.

Pushing the rear of the master doorlock switch will unlock all doors andthe hatch. Pushing forward the locktab on the driver’s door unlocks onlythat door.

106

Door Locks

130

Lock

Unlock

LOCK TABMASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

To unlock

To lock

10/09/02 13:58:26 31TM8610_135

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position (lever isdown), the door cannot be openedfrom the inside regardless of theposition of the lock tab. To open thedoor, push the lock tab forward anduse the outside door handle.

To lock any passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, pull thelock tab rearward and close the door.To lock the driver’s door, remove thekey from the ignition switch, pull thelock tab rearward or push the frontof the master switch, then close thedoor.

When the vehicle speed reachesabout 10 mph (U.S.)/15 km/h(Canada) or more, all the doors andthe hatch lock automatically.

When you shift to P after driving, thedriver’s door unlocks.

If you forget and leave the key in theignition switch, lockout preventionwill not allow you to lock the driver’sdoor. With any door or the hatchopen and the key in the ignitionswitch, locking with master doorlock switch is disabled. If the driver’sdoor is closed, the lock tab on thedriver’s door is not disabled. Pullingthe driver’s lock tab rearward willlock all doors and the hatch. If youtry to lock an open driver’s door bypulling the lock tab rearward, thedriver’s door lock tab pops out andunlocks the driver’s door.

Default setting

Lockout Prevention Childproof Door Locks

Door LocksInstrum

entsand

Controls

131

Unlock

Lock

LEVER

10/09/02 13:58:33 31TM8610_136

－

－

The ceiling light and the dooractivated spotlights come on whenyou press the UNLOCK button if thelights are in the door activatedposition. If you do not open any dooror the hatch within 30 seconds (orwhatever setting of the interior lightdimming time is set to), the light(s)will fade out. If you relock the doorsand the hatch with the remotetransmitter before 30 seconds haveelapsed, the light(s) will go offimmediately.

To change the lock/unlock settingand the relock timer setting, refer tothe customized settings on page .

The keyless lock acknowledgmentbeep and flashing of the lights canbe deactivated (see page ).

Press this button once tolock all doors and the hatch. Someexterior lights will flash once. Whenyou press LOCK twice within 5seconds, the horn will sounds toverify that the doors are locked. Youcannot lock the doors if any door orthe hatch is not fully closed or if thekey is in the ignition switch.

If you press the LOCK button twicewithin 5 seconds, you will hear ahorn to verify that the securitysystem has set.

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door (or all thedoors and the hatch depending onthe door lock setting). Press it twiceto unlock the remaining doors andthe hatch. Some exterior lights willflash twice when you press thebutton the first time.

If you do not open any door or thehatch within 30 seconds, they willautomatically relock, and thesecurity system (if equipped) willreset.

106

112

On LX and EX models

Remote Transmitter

LOCK

UNLOCK

132

LED LOCK BUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

10/09/02 13:58:39 31TM8610_137

－Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.

Battery type: CR1616

Press and hold thisbutton for about 1 second to attractattention; the horn will sound, andthe exterior lights will flash for about30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,press any other button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Panicmode does not work when the key isin the ignition switch.

CONTINUED

Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the TransmitterBattery

PANIC

Remote TransmitterInstrum

entsand

Controls

133

10/09/02 13:58:47 31TM8610_138

＋

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

Be careful when removingthis screw as the head of the screwcan strip out.

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby carefully prying on the edgewith a coin.

Remove the old battery and notethe polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame ( side facing down), theninsert it in the keypad.

An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulations forbattery disposal.

Install the parts in reverse order.

To replace the battery:1.

2.

3. 4.

5.

Remote Transmitter

134

NOTE:

SCREW

BATTERY

COIN

10/09/02 13:58:56 31TM8610_139




Remote TransmitterInstrum

entsand

Controls

135

10/09/02 13:59:00 31TM8610_140

The hatch will lock or unlock whenyou lock/unlock the driver’s doorwith the key, the remote transmitter,the master door lock switch, or thelock tab on the driver’s door.

To unlock the hatch, turn the keyclockwise twice, push the rear of themaster door lock switch, or pushUNLOCK twice on the remotetransmitter.

Keep the hatch closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thehatch and to prevent exhaust gasfrom getting into the interior. See

on page.

To open the hatch, push the release,and lift up. To close the hatch, usethe handle to lower it, then pressdown on the back edge.

56Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Hatch

136

INNER HANDLE

RELEASE

10/09/02 13:59:05 31TM8610_141

If the power door lock system cannotunlock the hatch, unlock it manually.

If you need to unlock the hatchmanually, it means there is aproblem with the hatch. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

Place a cloth on the top side of thecover to prevent scratches, then usea small flat-tip screwdriver to removethe cover on the back of the hatch.

Push the release lever to the lowerleft as shown, and push the hatch toopen it.

Unlocking the Hatch

HatchInstrum

entsand

Controls

137

Unlock

COVER

RELEASE LEVER

10/09/02 13:59:11 31TM8610_142

－

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. To raise the seat,repeatedly pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat cushion. To lowerthe seat, push the lever downrepeatedly.

To change the seat-back angle of thefront seat, pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat bottom.

Once a seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.To adjust the seat forward or

backward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position, andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

Make all adjustments before youstart driving.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

14 15Driver’s Seat Height AdjustmentFront Seat Adjustments

Seats

138

10/09/02 13:59:20 31TM8610_143

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning aboutimproperly positioning head restraints.

16

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from the likelihood ofwhiplash and other injuries.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the center of the backof the occupant’s head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

The front and rear outer headrestraints adjust for height. Youneed both hands to adjust therestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button and push the restraintdown.

CONTINUED

Head Restraints

Adjusting the Head Restraint

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

139

LEGS SEAT-BACK

RELEASEBUTTON

Front Position CUSHION

10/09/02 13:59:27 31TM8610_144

To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release button,then pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

When a passenger is seated in therear center seating position, thecenter head restraint should beadjusted up or down, to match thepassenger’s height.

The seat-back must be foldedforward (see page ) to get ceilingclearance for removal of the headrestraints.

142

For Rear Seat Head Restraints

Seats

Removing the Head Restraint

140

LEGS SEAT-BACK SEAT-BACKLEGS

RELEASEBUTTON

Rear Outer Position Rear Center Position

CUSHION

RELEASEBUTTON

CUSHION

10/09/02 13:59:33 31TM8610_145

After a collision, the activatedrestraint should return to its normalposition.

If the restraints do not return to theirnormal position, or in the event of asevere collision, have the vehicleinspected by a Honda dealer.

This reduces the distance betweenthe restraint and the occupant’s head.It also helps protect the occupants

against the likelihood of whiplashand injuries to the neck and upperspine.

The driver’s and front passenger’sseats have active head restraints. Ifthe vehicle is struck severely fromthe rear, the occupant properlysecured with the seat belt will bepushed against the seat-back and thehead restraint will automaticallymove forward.

When reinstalling a head restraint,put the legs back in place. Thenadjust it to the appropriate heightwhile pressing the release button.

Make sure the head restraint locksin position when you reinstall it.

CONTINUED

Seats

Active Head Restraints

Instruments

andC

ontrols

141

Failure to reinstall the headrestraints can result in severeinjury during a crash.

Always replace the headrestraints before driving.

10/09/02 13:59:41 31TM8610_146

Fold the seat-back forward.

Unlock the seat-back by pulling upthe release lever on the outer sideof each rear seat-back.

The rear seat-backs can be foldeddown for more cargo room.

Each side folds down separately, soyou can still carry one or twopassengers in the rear seat.

Remove any items from the seatbefore folding down the seat-back,and make sure there are no items onthe floor before folding down theseats.

Lower the rear head restraints totheir lowest positions. If you folddown the right side seat-back, alsoadjust the rear center headrestraint to its lowest position.

For a head restraint system to workproperly:

Do not hang any items on the headrestraints, or from the restraintlegs.

Only use genuine Hondareplacement head restraints.

Install each restraint in its properlocation.

Do not place any object betweenan occupant and the seat-back.

1.2.

3.

Seats

Folding the Rear Seats Down

142

RED INDICATOR

LEVER

10/09/02 13:59:51 31TM8610_147

The lid of the console compartmentcan be used as an armrest.

Make sure all items in the cargo areaare secured. Loose items can flyforward and cause injury if you haveto brake hard (Seeon page ).

Make sure the seat-back and seatcushion are locked securely and allrear shoulder belts are positioned infront of the rear seat-backs.

Do not put any heavy items on theseat-back when it is folded down.

Reverse this procedure to return theseat-back to the upright position. Pullon the seat-back to make sure it islatched. If the seat-back is notlatched fully, the seat belt will notwork properly and you will see thered indicator behind the releaselever as shown on the previous page.

308

U.S. LX and EX models

Seats

Armrest

Carrying Cargo

Instruments

andC

ontrols

143

10/09/02 13:59:59 31TM8610_148

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns theadjustment switch off to keep yoursettings.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Mirrors

144

SELECTORSWITCH

ADJUSTMENTSWITCH

TAB

10/09/02 14:00:07 31TM8610_149

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the rear window defoggerbutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on as a reminder. Press thebutton again to turn the heaters andthe defogger off.

This heated mirror function has atimer (see page ).123

On U.S. EX models and all Canadianmodels

Power Mirror Heaters

MirrorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

145

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

10/09/02 14:00:11 31TM8610_150

－

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower anywindow. To open a window, push theswitch down and hold it. Release theswitch when you want the window tostop. Pull back on the switch andhold it to close the window.

To open or close thedriver’s window, push or pull thewindow switch firmly down or up tothe second detent, and release it.The window will automatically godown or up all the way. To stop thewindow, pull or push the windowswitch briefly.

AUTO

Power Windows

146

DRIVER’SWINDOWSWITCH

FRONTPASSENGER’SWINDOW SWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

10/09/02 14:00:16 31TM8610_151

－

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

The driver’s window autoreverse function is disabled whenyou continuously pull up the switch.

If the driver’swindow senses any obstacle while itis closing automatically, it willreverse direction, and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

The windows and the main switchfeature will operate for up to 10minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either frontdoor cancels this function.

When you push the main switch in,the indicator comes on and thepassengers’ windows cannot beraised or lowered. Use the mainswitch when you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally. To cancelthis feature, push on the switchagain. The switch will pop out.

AUTO REVERSE

Power WindowsInstrum

entsand

Controls

147

NOTE:

10/09/02 14:00:21 31TM8610_152

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brakeindicator on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released (see page ).

If you drive without releasing theparking brake, a beeper will sound,and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASEPARKING BRAKE’’ message on themulti-information display.

63

Parking Brake

148

PARKING BRAKE LEVER

EX model is shown.

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and hubs. A beeper will sound ifthe vehicle is put into gear with theparking brake on.

10/09/02 14:00:26 31TM8610_153

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Interior Convenience ItemsInstrum

entsand

Controls

149

COAT HOOK SUN VISOR

FRONT DOORPOCKET

USB ADAPTERCABLE

BEVERAGE HOLDERSCENTER CONSOLECOMPARTMENT

CARGO AREA COVER

REAR DOOR BEVERAGEHOLDER

CENTER TRAY

GLOVE BOX

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET

FLOOR STORAGECOMPARTMENT

AUXILIARYINPUT JACK

SEAT-BACK POCKETS

UNDER FLOOR STORAGES

CARGO AREA

: If equippedEX model with navigation system is shown.

VANITY MIRROR

10/09/02 14:00:33 31TM8610_154

You can use the cargo area cover toconceal your parcels and protectthem from direct sunlight.

To extend the cargo area cover, pullout the cover from the housing bypulling the handle on the cover’sleading edge, then clip the mountingrods in the slots at both sides of thehatch opening.

To retract the cover, slip the rodsout of the hooks and guide the coverso it rolls back fully into its housing.

Do not store parcels on the cargoarea cover. The cover may break ifweight is placed on it.

On Canadian EX model only

Cargo Area Cover

Interior Convenience Items

150

HANDLE MOUNTING ROD

10/09/02 14:00:39 31TM8610_155

The cargo area cover housing unitcan be removed to give you morecargo space.

Release each side of the housing unitby pushing one end of the unittoward the other end and lifting itupward.

To reinstall the cargo area coverhousing unit, place one end of theunit in the holder on the side panel,then push it into the side panelslightly and insert the other end intoits holder.

Make sure the housing unit issecurely placed so it will not comeloose while you are driving.

You can store the cargo area coverunder the cargo area floor.

Open the cargo floor lid.

Open the cargo area cover holderlids located on both sides of thecargo area floor.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Storing the Cargo Area Cover


entsand

Controls

151

HOUSING UNIT

Push

LID

CARGO AREACOVER

LID

10/09/02 14:00:47 31TM8610_156

Store the cover in its holders asshown in the illustration above.

Reinstall the cargo floor lid.

To open the cargo floor, fold thecargo floor forward.

To use the storage compartmentlocated on the left side of the cargoarea floor, hold the strap and raisethe lid.

Close the lid by pressing until itlatches.

3.

4.

Under Floor Storages Floor Storage Compartments


152

STRAP

LID

CARGO FLOORSTORAGESCARGO AREACOVER

10/09/02 14:00:56 31TM8610_157

Spilled liquids can damage theupholstery, carpeting, and electricalcomponents in the interior.

Your vehicle has an accessory powersocket in the front console panel.

To use an accessory power socket,the ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

This socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the front and rear door pocketbeverage holders when you open orclose the doors. Use only resealablecontainers in the door pockets.

CONTINUED

Beverage Holders Accessory Power Sockets


entsand

Controls

153

FRONT REAR

BEVERAGE HOLDERS

BEVERAGE HOLDERS

LX model is shown.Insight model and Canadian LX model

10/09/02 14:01:05 31TM8610_158

It will not power an automotive typecigarette lighter element.

Make sure to put the socket coverback in place to prevent any smallforeign objects from getting into thesocket.

To open the console compartment,pull up on the lever and lift thearmrest.

To close, lower the armrest, andpush it down until it latches.

The glove box light comes on whenthe parking lights are on.

Open the glove box by pulling thehandle to the left. Close it with a firmpush.

On EX models only

On EX and U.S. LX models

Console Compartment Glove Box


154

LEVER

10/09/02 14:01:13 31TM8610_159

There is a tray in the front of thecenter console. You can also take thepartition out to extend the tray.

When you use the front beverageholders, you need to put the partitionback to the original position on thecenter console.

To open the center pocket, push onthe knob. To close it, push the lid upuntil it latches.

Center Tray Center Pockets


entsand

Controls

155

PARTITION KNOB

Push

LID

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

10/09/02 14:01:19 31TM8610_160

To use the vanity mirror on the backof the sun visor, pull up the cover.

To use the sun visor, pull it down.You can also use the sun visor at theside window. Remove the supportrod from the clip and swing the sunvisor toward the side window.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle.

To use a coat hook, slide it outslightly, then pull it down.

Make sure the coat hook is pulled upwhen you are not using it. This hookis not designed for large or heavyitems.

On U.S. EX models and Canadianmodels

Vanity MirrorSun VisorsCoat Hook


156

COAT HOOK

EX model is shown.

10/09/02 14:01:28 31TM8610_161

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch: ON, Door Activated, andOFF. In the Door Activated (center)position, the light comes on whenyou:

After all doors are closed tightly, thelight dims slightly, then fades out inabout 30 seconds.

The ceiling light (with the switch inthe center position) comes on whenyou remove the key from the ignitionswitch. If you do not open a door, thelight stays on, then fades out inabout 30 seconds.

Turn on a spotlight by pushing thelens. Push the lens again to turn itoff. You can use the spotlights at alltimes.

Unlock the driver’s door with thekey or remote transmitter.

Open any door.

To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page

.

If you leave any door open withoutthe key in the ignition switch, theceiling light will go off after about 15minutes.

105

CONTINUED

Ceiling Light Spotlights

Interior LightsInstrum

entsand

Controls

157

DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION

EX model with navigation system

Push

Push

SPOTLIGHTS

10/09/02 14:01:38 31TM8610_162

Your vehicle has a cargo area lighton the left side panel of the cargoarea. It comes on when you open thehatch.

Cargo Area Light

Interior Lights

158

U.S. EX model

Push

CARGO AREA LIGHT

Push

SPOTLIGHTS

10/09/02 14:01:43 31TM8610_163

The climate control system in yourvehicle provides a comfortabledriving environment in all weatherconditions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This sectiondescribes those features and how touse them.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourvehicle.

...............Climate Control System . 160................................Audio System . 166

..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 167................................Playing a Disc . 171

.......Disc Player Error Messages . 178

..........Playing the FM/AM Radio . 179................................Playing a Disc . 186

.......Disc Player Error Messages . 192............................Playing an iPod . 193

.................iPod Error Messages . 199Playing a USB Flash Memory

........................................Device . 200USB Flash Memory Device Error

...................................Messages . 209

..........Playing the FM/AM Radio . 210................................Playing a Disc . 216

.......Disc Player Error Messages . 226..........................Playing a PC card . 227

...PC Card Player Malfunction . 240............................Playing an iPod . 241

.................iPod Error Messages . 248

Playing a USB Flash Memory........................................Device . 249

USB Flash Memory Device Error...................................Messages . 257

............FM/AM Radio Reception . 258..................Protecting Your Discs . 260................Remote Audio Controls . 263

......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 264.................Radio Theft Protection . 265

..........................Setting the Clock . 266............................Security System . 267

...............................Cruise Control . 268........HandsFreeLink . 271

Insight model

LX model and EX model withoutnavigation system

EX model with navigation system

Bluetooth

FeaturesF

eatures

159

10/09/02 14:01:49 31TM8610_164

Climate Control System

160

TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

FRESH AIR BUTTON

WINDSHIELDDEFROST BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRRORS BUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

OFF BUTTON

MODE CONTROL BUTTON

FAN CONTROL BAR

U.S. EX model and Canadian models

10/09/02 14:01:53 31TM8610_165

CONTINUED

On models with navigation system The automatic climate controlsystem in your vehicle maintains theinterior temperature you select. Thesystem also adjusts the fan speedand airflow levels.

The climate control system for yourvehicle can also be operated usingthe voice control system. See thenavigation system manual forcomplete details.

Press the AUTO button. You willsee AUTO in the display.

Set the desired temperature byturning the temperature controldial.

The system automatically selectsthe proper mix of conditionedand/or heated air that will, asquickly as possible, raise or lowerthe interior temperature to yourpreference.

During the auto idle stop, the airconditioning system will be turnedoff. If the ECON mode is selected,the fan may also be turned off.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

2.

1.

Voice Control System Using Automatic Climate Control


Temperature Control

Features

161

10/09/02 14:02:02 31TM8610_166

▲

▼

When you set the temperature to itslower limit ( ) or its upper limit( ), the system runs at fullcooling or heating only. It does notregulate the interior temperature.

When you adjust a fan control, thefan is taken out of AUTO mode.

If you press the OFF button, theclimate control system shuts offcompletely.

Keep the system completely offfor short periods only.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times. Press the side of the bar to

increase the fan speed and airflow.Press the side of the bar todecrease them.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in fully automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordAUTO in the display to go out.

To Turn Everything Off Semi-automatic Operation

Fan Control


162

10/09/02 14:02:10 31TM8610_167

CONTINUED

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set thetemperature control below theoutside temperature.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).

Pushing this button also turns thepower mirror heaters on and off.

When the recirculation indicator ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.

Select recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

The outside air intakes for theclimate control system are at thebase of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

When the fresh air indicator is on,air is brought in from the outside ofthe vehicle.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

123

On U.S. EX models and all Canadianmodels


Air Conditioning (A/C) Button Recirculation Button Rear Window Defogger Button

Fresh Air Button

Features

163

10/09/02 14:02:22 31TM8610_168

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows, set as follows:Use the mode control button to

select the vents the air flows from.Some air will flow from thedashboard vents in all modes.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor and corner vents and thedefroster vents at the base of thewindshield.

This button directs the main airflowto the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anymode selection you may have made.

Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.For faster defogging, manually setthe fan speed to high.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. Forfaster defrosting, manually set thefan speed to high. You can alsoincrease airflow to the windshield byclosing the corner vents on thedashboard.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

1.

2.

3.

4.


Mode Control Windshield Defroster Button

164

10/09/02 14:02:33 31TM8610_169

To regulate the interior temperatureand humidity, the climate controlsystem has two sensors. A sunlightsensor is located in the top of thedashboard and a temperature/humidity sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.


Sunlight, Temperature, andHumidity Sensors

Features

165

TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSORSUNLIGHT SENSOR

10/09/02 14:02:37 31TM8610_170

An audio system is standard on allmodels. Read the appropriate pages(as shown below) to use yourvehicle’s audio system.

For LX and EX models withoutnavigation system, see pages

through .

For EX model with navigationsystem, see pages through .

For Insight model, see pagesthrough .167 178

179 209

210 257

Audio SystemF

eatures

166

EX models with navigation system

Insight model LX and EX models withoutnavigation system

10/09/02 14:02:45 31TM8610_171

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Insight model)F

eatures

167

AMBUTTON

FMBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

SEEK/SKIP BAR

TUNE KNOB

A.SEL/SCANBAR

10/09/02 14:02:49 31TM8610_172

－

－

－

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob to the right to tune toa higher frequency, and turn it to theleft to tune to a lower frequency.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thepower/volume knob or the AM orFM button. Adjust the volume byturning the power/volume knob.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe right side of the A. SEL/SCANbar, then release it. You will seeSCAN in the display. The system willscan for a station with a strong signal.When it finds one, it will stop andplay that station for about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN side of the bar again.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station is broad-casting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

The seek functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or side of theSEEK bar, then release it.

To Select a Station

TUNE

To Play the AM/FM Radio SCAN

SEEK/SKIP

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Insight model)

168

10/09/02 14:02:56 31TM8610_173

－

－

－ If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

For information on AM/FM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.

Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM and twofrequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. You can store one frequencyon FM1, and one frequency onFM2 with each preset button.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

, press theA. SEL side of the bar. This restoresthe presets you originally set.

Press the left side of theA. SEL/SCAN bar. You will seeA. SEL flashing in the display, andthe system goes into scan mode forseveral seconds. It stores thefrequencies of six AM, and twelveFM stations in the preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.

Pick a preset button (1 6), andhold it until you hear a beep.

If you aretraveling and can no longer receiveyour preset stations, you can use theauto select feature to find stations inthe local area.1.

2.

3.

4.

258

To turn off auto select

Preset AUTO SELECT

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Insight model)F

eatures

169

10/09/02 14:03:05 31TM8610_174

－

－

－

－

－

Adjusts the volume levelbased on the vehicle speed.Press the SOUND (TUNE) knob

repeatedly to display the BASS,TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, andSVC (speed-sensitive volumecompensation) settings.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the TUNE knob toadjust the setting to your liking.

When the level reaches the center,you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.

Adjusts the bass.

Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound.

Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.

The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. Turn the TUNE knob toadjust the setting to your liking. Ifyou feel the sound is too loud,choose low. If you feel the sound istoo quiet, choose high.

The SVC mode controls the volumebased on vehicle speed. The fasteryou go, the louder the audio volumebecomes. As you slow down, theaudio volume decreases.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

The system will return to the audiodisplay about 5 seconds after youstop adjusting a mode.

Except SVC adjustment

121

Adjusting the Sound SVC

BASS

TREBLE

FADER

BALANCE

Audio System Lighting

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Insight model)

Speed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC)

170

10/09/02 14:03:15 31TM8610_175

Playing a Disc (Insight model)F

eatures

171

REPEAT BUTTONEJECTBUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

A.SEL/SCANBAR

CD/AUXBUTTON

TUNE KNOB

LOADINDICATOR

DISP BUTTONSEEK/SKIP BAR

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

10/09/02 14:03:20 31TM8610_176

You operate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio. Toselect the disc player, press the CD/AUX button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in thedisplay.

To load or play a disc, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA formats. Whenplaying a disc in MP3, you will see‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMAformat, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in thedisplay. You can select up to 99folders, or up to 255 tracks/files.

If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc isprotected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audio unitdisplays FORMAT, and then skips tothe next file.

Video CDs and DVDs do not work inthis unit.

Depending on the software the fileswere made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, or displaysome text data.

To Play a Disc

Playing a Disc (Insight model)

172

NOTE:

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

10/09/02 14:03:28 31TM8610_177

＞

CONTINUED

Insert a disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way to play it. Youoperate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio.The number of the current track isshown in the display. When playing adisc in MP3 or WMA, the numbersof the current folder and file areshown. The system will continuouslyplay a disc until you change modes.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

Each time you press the DISP button,the display shows you the text dataon a disc, if the disc was recordedwith text data.

You can see the album, artist, andtrack name in the display. If a disc isrecorded in MP3 or WMA, you cansee the folder and file name, and thealbum, artist, and track tag.

With the folder name, you will seethe FOLDER indicator in the display.The TRACK indicator is shown withthe file or track name.

The display shows up to 10characters of selected text data (thefolder name, file name, etc.). If thetext data has more than 10characters, you will see the first 9characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold the DISPbutton until the next 10 charactersare shown.


To Load a Disc Text Data Display Function

Features

173

10/09/02 14:03:35 31TM8610_178

－ Each time youpress and release the side ofthe SEEK/SKIP bar, the player skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack (file in MP3 or WMA mode).Press and release the side, toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current track. Press it again toskip to the beginning of the previoustrack.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or side of theSEEK/SKIP bar.

You can use the SEEK/SKIP barwhile a disc is playing to selectpassages and change tracks (files inMP3/WMA mode).

When playing a CD-DA with textdata, the album and track name areshown in the display. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, the display shows thefolder and file name.

You will also see some text dataunder these conditions:

When a new folder, file, or track isselected.

When you change the audio modeto play a disc with text data or inMP3 or WMA.

When you insert a disc, and thesystem begins to play.

To Change or Select Tracks/Files

SEEK/SKIP


174

10/09/02 14:03:41 31TM8610_179

－

－

－－Toselect a different folder, turn theTUNE knob to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Turnthe knob to the right to skip to thenext folder, and to the left to move tothe beginning of the current folder.Turn it again to skip to the beginningof the previous folder. Turning theTUNE knob more than one clickskips several folders at a time.

To continuously replaya track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),press and release the RPT button.You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in the display.Press and hold the RPT button for 2seconds to turn it off.

This feature plays thetracks within a disc (the files in MP3or WMA mode) in random order. Toactivate random play, press andrelease the RDM button. In MP3 orWMA mode, press the RDM buttonrepeatedly to select RDM (within adisc random play). You will see‘‘RDM’’ in the display. Press theRDM button for 2 seconds to returnto normal play.

This feature,when activated, replays all files inthe selected folder in the order theyare compressed. To activate folderrepeat, press the RPT button twice.You will see F-RPT in the display.The system continuously replays thecurrent folder. Press the RPT buttonagain to turn it off. Pressing theRDM button, or selecting a differentfolder with the TUNE knob alsoturns off the repeat feature.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromfile repeat to folder repeat, then tonormal play.

In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode

CONTINUED

FOLDER SELECTION

REPEAT (TRACK/FILEREPEAT)

RANDOM (Random within adisc)FOLDER-REPEAT


eatures

175

10/09/02 14:03:47 31TM8610_180

－－

－In MP3 or WMA modeIn MP3 or WMA mode

Thisfeature, when activated, samples thefirst file of each folder on the disc.To activate folder scan, press theSCAN bar twice. You will seeF-SCAN in the display.

The system plays the first file in thefirst folder for about 10 seconds. Ifyou do nothing, the system will thenplay the first files in the next foldersfor 10 seconds. After playing the firstfile in the last folder, the systemplays normally.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP bar, selecting a different folderwith the TUNE knob, or pressing theSCAN bar, also turns off folder scan.

The scan function samples all tracks(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc inthe order they are recorded on thedisc. To activate scan, press andrelease the SCAN bar. You will seeSCAN in the display. You will get a10 second sampling of each track/file on the disc. Press and hold theSCAN button for about 2 seconds toget out of scan mode and play thelast track/file sampled.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP bar also turns off the scanfeature.

Each time you press and release theSCAN bar, the mode changes fromscan to folder scan, then to normalplay.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays allfiles on the selected folder in randomorder. To activate folder random,press the RDM button. You will seeF-RDM in the display. The systemwill then select and play filesrandomly. This continues until youdeactivate folder random by pressingand holding the RDM button for 2seconds.

Each time you press and release theRDM button, the mode changesfrom folder random play to randomplay (within a disc random play),then to normal play.

F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN)SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)

FOLDER-RANDOM


176

10/09/02 14:03:55 31TM8610_181

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the disc willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the disc will beginplaying where it left off.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe disc after 10 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD/AUX button.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM or FM button.Press the CD/AUX button again toswitch back to the disc player.

260

Protecting Discs

To Stop Playing a Disc


eatures

177

10/09/02 14:04:02 31TM8610_182

The ejected disc will not be reloaded automatically.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takeyour vehicle to your dealer.The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.For additional information ondamaged discs, see page .

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

CauseError Message Solution

261

Track/File format notsupported

Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Current track will be skipped. The nextsupported track or file plays automatically.Press the eject button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirtsee page 261. Insert the disc again. If the codedoes not disappear, or the disc cannot beremoved, consult your dealer. Do not try toforce the disc out of the player.

Disc Player Error Messages (Insight model)

178

CD FORMAT

BAD DISCCHECK MANUAL

PUSH EJECT

BAD DISCCHECK MANUAL

10/09/02 14:04:09 31TM8610_183

Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model and EX model without navigation system)F

eatures

179

SEEK BUTTON

A.SEL BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

SEEK BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

VOL/SELECT KNOB

FM/AM BUTTON

BUTTON

BUTTON

BUTTON

10/09/02 14:04:14 31TM8610_184

－－

－

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing theFM/AM button. Adjust the volumeby turning the VOL/SELECT knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are displayed.To change bands, press the FM/AMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction in AM is not available.


Use the SEEK button totune to a desired frequency. Pressthe button to tune to a higherfrequency, and the button totune to a lower frequency.

You can also operate the tunefunction by using the VOL/SELECTknob. Press the VOL/SELECT knoband you will see ‘‘SEL’’ in the display.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency. To turn it off, pressthe VOL/SELECT knob or

button, or button.The system will return to the normaldisplay about 10 seconds after youstop adjusting the tune mode.

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press and hold the or sideof the SEEK button until you hear abeep, then release it.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.When the system finds a strongsignal, it will stop and play thatstation for about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

To Play the FM/AM Radio

To Select a Station

TUNE SEEK

SCAN

Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model and EX model without navigation system)

180

10/09/02 14:04:24 31TM8610_185

－－

－

If you aretraveling and can no longer receiveyour preset stations, you can use theauto select feature to find stations inthe local area.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A. SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM and twelve FM stations inthe preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forthat preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

press theA. SEL button. This restores thepresets you originally set.

For information on FM/AM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.


Select the desired band, AM orFM.


Pick a preset number (1 6), andhold it until you hear a beep.


1.

2.

3.

4.

258

To turn off auto select,

AUTO SELECTPreset


eatures

181

10/09/02 14:04:32 31TM8610_186

On the FM band, you can select afavorite station and display theprogram service name provided bythe radio data system (RDS).

The program service name displayfunction shows the name of thestation you are listening to. You canturn this function on or off.

To switch the function between onand off, press and release the TITLEbutton. With the system on, you willsee the ‘‘RDS INFO ON’’ message onthe display. If the station you arelistening to is an RDS station, thedisplay shows the station name.

If the station you are listening to isnot an RDS station, the displaycontinues to show the frequencywith the PS name display function on.

When you turn off this function bypressing the TITLE button, thedisplay shows ‘‘RDS INFO OFF.’’

Radio Data System (RDS)

Program Service (PS) Name Display


182

PROGRAM SERVICENAME DISPLAY ON

10/09/02 14:04:40 31TM8610_187

With the FM band selected, you canselect the program categoryprovided by the RDS. Press

or button to displayand select an RDS category. Theprincipal RDS categories are shownas follows;

ALL PTY: All RDS category stationsROCK: Rock, classic rock and softrock musicCOUNTRY: Country musicSOFT: Adult hits and soft musicTOP 40: Top 40 hitsOLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldiesR & B: Rhythm and blues, and softrhythm and bluesRELIGION: Programs concernedwith religion.CLASSIC: Classical musicJAZZ: JazzINFO: News, information, sports,talk shows, foreign language,personality, public, college, andweatherTRAFFIC: Traffic information

Press or button toselect an RDS category. The displayshows the selected RDS categoryname for about 10 seconds. You canuse the search or scan function tofind radio stations in the selectedRDS category. If you do nothingwhile the RDS category name isdisplayed, the selected category iscanceled.

CONTINUED

Radio Data System (RDS) Category


eatures

183

RDS CATEGORY

10/09/02 14:04:52 31TM8610_188

The scan function samples allstations with strong signals on theselected RDS category. To activate it,press and release the SCAN button.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal in the selectedRDS category. You will also see theselected RDS category nameblinking while searching it. When itfinds a strong signal, it will stop andplay that station for about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 10 seconds. When it playsa station that you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

This function searches a frequencyfor a strong signal from thefrequency that carry the selectedRDS category information. This canhelp you to find a station in yourfavorite category. To activate it,press the or side of theSEEK button. You will see theselected RDS category nameblinking while searching it. Whenthe system finds a station, theselected RDS category name will bedisplayed again for about 5 seconds.

If the system does not find a station,‘‘NOTHING’’ will blink for about 5seconds, then the system goes backto the last selected station.

If the system does not find a station,‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking forabout 5 seconds, then the systemgoes back to the last selected station.

You can use the RDS programsearch or scan function even if theRDS information display function isoff. In this case, the display shows afrequency in place of a RDS stationname.

RDS Program SCANRDS Program Search


184

10/09/02 14:05:00 31TM8610_189

－

－

－

－

－Press the sound ( ) button toselect an appropriate setting: bass,treble, fader, balance, and SVC(speed-sensitive volumecompensation). Turn the VOL/SELECT knob to adjust the setting.

Adjusts the bass.

Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound.

Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the VOL/SELECTknob to adjust the setting to yourliking. When the level reaches thecenter, you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.

Adjusts the volume levelbased on the vehicle speed.


The SVC mode controls the volumebased on vehicle speed. The fasteryou go, the louder the audio volumebecomes. As you slow down, theaudio volume decreases.

The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. Turn the VOL/SELECT knobto adjust the setting to your liking. Ifyou feel the sound is too loud,choose low. If you feel the sound istoo quiet, choose high.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the system is turnedoff.

121

Adjusting the Sound

BAS

TREBLE

FADER

BALANCE

SVC Audio System Lighting

Speed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC)


eatures

185

10/09/02 14:05:11 31TM8610_190

Playing a Disc (LX model and EX model without navigation system)

186

TITLE BUTTON

CD BUTTON DISC SLOT

EJECT BUTTON

SEEK BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

SEEK BUTTON

RDM BUTTON

RPT BUTTON

BUTTON BUTTON

BUTTON

10/09/02 14:05:17 31TM8610_191

You operate the in-dash disc playerwith the same controls used for theradio. To select the disc player, pressthe CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ inthe display. The folder or tracknumbers are shown in the display.You can also select the displayedinformation with the TITLE button(see page ). The system willcontinuously play a disc until youchange modes.

This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA formats. The numbersof the folder and track playing areshown in the display on the discplayer. A disc can support more than99 folders, and each folder can holdmore than 255 playable files. A disccan hold up to 999 files in total.

When there are more than 99 foldersin a disc, the audio display onlyshows two digits.

If a file on a WMA disc is protectedby digital rights management(DRM), the audio unit displaysUNSUPPORTED, and then skips tothe next file.

If you have a disc that is acombination of CD-DA tracks andMP3/WMA files, you can choose theformat to listen by pressing the CDbutton.

Video CDs and DVDs will not workin this unit.

A disc compressed in AAC formatcannot be played in this audiosystem.


188

CONTINUED

To Play a Disc

Playing a Disc (LX model and EX model without navigation system)F

eatures

187

NOTE:Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

10/09/02 14:05:24 31TM8610_192

＞

The display shows up to 16characters of selected text data (thefolder name, file name, etc.).

If the text data has more than 16characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator onthe display. Press and hold theTITLE button until the next 16characters are shown. You can seeup to 31 characters of text data.

When you press and release theTITLE button while a disc withouttext data is playing, you will see ‘‘NOINFO’’ on the display.

With the folder name, you will seethe FOLDER indicator in the display.The TRACK indicator is shown withthe file or track name.

You can see the album, artist, andtrack name in the display. If a disc isrecorded in MP3 or WMA, you cansee the folder and file name, and thealbum, artist, and track tag.

Each time you press the TITLEbutton, the display shows you thetext, if the disc was recorded withtext data.

Insert a disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way to play it. Youoperate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio.The number of the current track isshown in the display. When playing adisc in MP3 or WMA, the numbersof the current folder and file areshown. The system will continuouslyplay a disc until you change modes.



.260

Text Data Display FunctionTo Load a Disc


188

10/09/02 14:05:32 31TM8610_193

－If you press and hold the TITLEbutton again, the display shows thefirst 15 characters again.

If any letter is not available, it isreplaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.When the disc has no text data, youwill see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.

You will also see some text dataunder these conditions:

When a new folder, file, or track isselected.

When you change the audio modeto play a disc with text data or inMP3 or WMA.

When you insert a disc, and thesystem begins to play.

When playing a CD-DA with textdata, the album and track name areshown in the display. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, the display shows thefolder and file name.

Each time youpress and release the side, theplayer skips forward to thebeginning of the next track (files inMP3/WMA mode). Press andrelease the side to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previoustrack.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the , or the

button.

You can also operate the trackselection by using the VOL/SELECTknob. Press the VOL/SELECT knoband you will see ‘‘SEL’’ in the display.Turn the knob to switch the tracknumber. Press the VOL/SELECTknob or button to set yourselection. To turn it off, press the

button.

You can use the SEEK button whilea disc is playing to change tracks(files in MP3/WMA mode).

In MP3/WMA mode, use theor button to select

folders in the disc, and use the SEEKbutton to change files.

CONTINUED

SEEK/SKIP



Features

189

10/09/02 14:05:44 31TM8610_194

－

－－

－－Toselect a different folder, press the

or button. Press thebutton to skip to the next

folder, and the button to skipto the previous folder.

To continuously replaya track (file in MP3/WMA mode),press and release the RPT button.You will see RPT in the display.Press and hold the RPT button toturn it off.


This feature plays thetracks within a disc in random order.In MP3/WMA mode, all files in allfolders are played in random order.To activate random mode, press theRDM button repeatedly until you seeRDM in the display. Press and holdthe RDM button to turn it off.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays thefiles in the current folder in randomorder, rather than in the order theyare compressed in MP3/WMA. Toactivate folder random play, pressthe RDM button. You will seeF-RDM in the display. The systemwill then select and play filesrandomly. This continues until youdeactivate folder random play bypressing and holding the RDMbutton.

Each time you press and release theRDM button, the mode changesfrom folder random play, to within adisc random play, then to normalplay.

This feature,when activated, replays all the filesin the selected folder in the orderthey are compressed in MP3/WMA.To activate folder repeat mode, pressthe RPT button repeatedly until yousee F-RPT in the display. The systemcontinuously replays the currentfolder. Press and hold the RPTbutton to turn it off.

You can also operate the folder andfile selection by using the VOL/SELECT knob. Press the VOL/SELECT knob and you will see‘‘SEL’’ in the display. Turn the knobto switch the folder number andpress the knob to set your selection.To turn it off, press the

button repeatedly.

In MP3/WMA mode In MP3/WMA mode In MP3/WMA modeFOLDER SELECTION

REPEAT (TRACK/FILEREPEAT)

RANDOM (Random within adisc)

FOLDER-RANDOMFOLDER-REPEAT


190

10/09/02 14:05:53 31TM8610_195

－－

This feature,when activated, samples the first filein each folder on the disc in theorder they are recorded. To activatethe folder scan feature, press theSCAN button repeatedly. You willsee ‘‘F-SCAN’’ in the display. Thesystem will then play the first file inthe main folders for about 10seconds. When it plays a file that youwant to continue listening to, pressand hold the SCAN button. Whenthe system samples the first file ofall folders, F-SCAN is canceled, andthe system plays normally.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom file scan to folder scan, then tonormal play.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe disc after 10 seconds and beginplaying.

Press the FM/AM button to switchto the radio while a disc is playing.To play the disc, press the CD button.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with the( ) button or by turning off theignition switch, the disc will stay inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the disc will begin playingwhere it left off.


.

The SCAN functionsamples all the tracks on the disc inthe order they are recorded on thedisc (all files in the current folder inMP3 or WMA mode). To activate thescan feature, press and release theSCAN button. You will see ‘‘SCAN’’in the display. You will get a 10second sampling of each track/file inthe disc/folder. Press and hold theSCAN button to get out of scanmode and play the last track sampled.

260

In MP3/WMA modeFOLDER-SCAN


Protecting Discs

SCAN

Playing a Disc (LX model and EX model without navigation system)F

eatures

191

10/09/02 14:06:01 31TM8610_196

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.

For the additional information ondamaged discs, see page .

Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

SolutionCauseError Message

261

Current track will be skipped. The nextsupported track or file plays automatically.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt(see page 261). Insert the disc again. If the codedoes not disappear, or the disc cannot beremoved, consult your dealer. Do not try toforce the disc out of the player.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check if it is inserted correctly in the discplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.For more information, see page 261.

Track/File format notsupported

Mechanical Error

FOCUS Error

TOC Error

Disc Player Error Messages (LX model and EX model without navigation system)

192

UNSUPPORTED

BAD DISCPLEASE CHECK

OWNERSMANUAL

PUSH EJECT

CHECK DISC

10/09/02 14:06:07 31TM8610_197

＋－

Playing an iPod (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)F

eatures

193

BUTTON

BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

BUTTON

AUX BUTTONiPod INDICATOR

USB INDICATOR

RDM BUTTON

RPT BUTTON

SEEK (SKIP ) BUTTONSEEK (SKIP ) BUTTON

10/09/02 14:06:12 31TM8610_198

Do not connect your iPod using ahub.

Do not keep the iPod in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage it.

Do not use an extension cablebetween the USB adapter cableequipped with your vehicle andyour dock connector.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing it.

Some devices cannot be poweredor charged via the USB adapter. Ifthis is the case, use the accessoryadapter to supply power to yourdevice.

This system may not work with allsoftware versions of these devices.

iPod models confirmed to becompatible with your audio systemusing the USB adapter cable are:

This audio system can play the audiofiles on the iPod with the samecontrols used for the in-dash discplayer. To play an iPod, connect it tothe USB adapter cable in the consolecompartment by using your dockconnector, then press the AUXbutton. The ignition switch must bein the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position. The iPod will also berecharged with the ignition switch inthese positions.

The system will only play songsstored on the iPod with iTunes.

iPod and iTunes are registeredtrademarks owned by Apple Inc.

ModeliPod classic (80/160 G)iPod classic (120 G)iPod with video (iPod 5th generation)iPod nanoiPod nano 2nd generationiPod nano 3rd generationiPod nano 4th generationiPod nano 5th generationiPod touchiPod touch 2nd generation

Playing an iPod (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)

To Play an iPod

194

NOTE:

10/09/02 14:06:23 31TM8610_199

Unclip the USB connector bypivoting it, and pull out the USBadapter cable in the consolecompartment.

Connect your dock connector tothe iPod correctly and securely.

Install the dock connector to theUSB adapter cable securely.

If the iPod indicator does not appearin the audio display, check theconnections, and try to reconnect theiPod a few times.

If the audio system still does notrecognize the iPod, the iPod mayneed to be reset. Follow theinstructions that came with youriPod, or you can find resetinstructions online at

1. 2.

3.

www.apple.com/itunes/

CONTINUED

Connecting an iPod


eatures

195

DOCK CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTERCABLE

USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

10/09/02 14:06:30 31TM8610_200

－＋

－

＞

Use the SKIP button while an iPod isplaying to change files.

Each time you press the(SKIP ) button, the system

skips forward to the beginning of thenext file. Press the (SKIP )button, to skip backward to thebeginning of the current file. Press itagain to skip to the beginning of theprevious file.

To move rapidly within a file, pressand hold either side ( or )of the SKIP button.

Each time you press the TITLEbutton the display mode switchesbetween the album name, the songname, the artist name, or name off(which turns off the text display).

The display shows up to 16characters of the selected data. If thetext data has more than 16characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold theTITLE button until the next 16characters are shown.

To Change or Select FilesText Data Display Function

SKIP


196

10/09/02 14:06:38 31TM8610_201

－

－You can also select a file from anylist on the iPod menu: playlists,artists, albums and songs, by usingthe VOL/SELECT knob. Push theVOL/SELECT knob to switch thedisplay to an iPod menu, then turnthe VOL/SELECT knob to select adesired list. Press the VOL/SELECTknob to set your selection.

The display shows items on theselected list. Turn the VOL/SELECT knob to select an item, thenpress the VOL/SELECT knob to setyour selection.

If you select ‘‘ALL,’’ all available fileson the selected list are played.

Pressing the button goes backto the previous display and pressingthe TITLE button cancels thissetting mode.

You can select any type of repeat andshuffle mode by using the RPTbutton or the RDM button.

This featurecontinuously plays a file. To activatethe repeat feature, press the RPTbutton. You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in thedisplay. To turn it off, press the RPTbutton again.

This featureplays all available files in a selectedlist (playlists, artists, albums orsongs) in random order. To activatethe shuffle all feature, press theRDM button. You will see ‘‘RDM’’ inthe display. To turn it off, press andhold the RDM button.

CONTINUED

To Select Repeat or Shuffle Mode:

REPEAT

SHUFFLE ALL


eatures

197

Press theVOL/SELECT knob.

10/09/02 14:06:47 31TM8610_202

－

＊

＊

This featureplays all available albums in aselected list (playlists, artists, albumsor songs) in random order. The filesin each album are played in therecorded order. To activate theshuffle album feature, press theRDM button repeatedly. You will see‘‘F-RDM’’ in the display. To turn itoff, press and hold the RDM button.

Each time you press the RDMbutton, the mode changes fromshuffle all play to shuffle album play,then to normal play.

To play the radio when an iPod isplaying, press the FM/AM button. Ifa disc is in the audio unit, press theCD button to play the disc.

You can disconnect the iPod at anytime when you see the ‘‘OK todisconnect’’ message in the iPoddisplay. Always make sure you seethe ‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message inthe iPod display before youdisconnect it. Make sure to followthe iPod’s instructions on how todisconnect the dock connector fromthe USB adapter cable.

The displayed message mayvary on models or versions. Onsome models, there is nomessage to disconnect.

If you reconnect the same iPod, thesystem may begin playing where itleft off, depending on what mode theiPod is in when it is reconnected.

When you disconnect the iPod whileit is playing, the display shows ‘‘USBNO DATA.’’

:

SHUFFLE ALBUM To Stop Playing Your iPod

Disconnecting an iPod


198

10/09/02 14:06:55 31TM8610_203

If you see an error message on theaudio display while playing an iPod,find the solution in the chart to theright. If you cannot clear the errormessage, take your vehicle to yourdealer.


USB ROM Error

Appears when anincompatible device isconnected

No files in iPod

Use of unsupportediPod

Recognition failure ofiPod

There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audiosystem off, and turn it on again. Do notreconnect the device that caused the error.

Appears when the iPod is empty. Store somefiles in the iPod.Appears when an unsupported iPod isconnected. See page 194 for the specificationinformation for iPods. If it appears when asupported iPod is connected, update the iPodsoftware to the newer version.Appears when the system dose notacknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

iPod Error Messages (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)F

eatures

199

USB ERRORBAD USBDEVICE

PLEASE CHECKOWNERSMANUAL

iPod NO SONG

UNSUPPORTEDVER.

CONNECT RETRY

10/09/02 14:07:00 31TM8610_204

＋－

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)

200

TITLE BUTTON

SEEK (SKIP )BUTTON

USB INDICATOR AUX BUTTON

SEEK (SKIP )BUTTON

RDM BUTTON

RPT BUTTON

VOL/SELECT BUTTON

BUTTON

BUTTON

BUTTON

10/09/02 14:07:05 31TM8610_205

＊

＊

CONTINUED

The recommended USB flashmemory devices are 256 MB orhigher, and formatted with the FATfile system. Some digital audioplayers may be compatible as well.Some USB flash memory devices(such as devices with security lock-out features, etc.) will not work inthis audio unit.

The audio system reads and playsthe audio files on the USB flashmemory device in MP3, WMA orAAC formats. Depending on theformat, the display shows MP3,WMA or AAC when a USB flashmemory device is playing. The USBflash memory device limit is up to700 folders or up to 65535 files.

Only AAC format files recordedwith iTunes are playable on thisaudio unit.

This audio system can operate theaudio files on a USB flash memorydevice with the same controls usedfor the in-dash disc player. To play aUSB flash memory device, connect itto the USB adapter cable in theconsole compartment, then press theAUX button.

:

To Play a USB Flash MemoryDevice

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)F

eatures

201

10/09/02 14:07:11 31TM8610_206

Do not use a device such as a cardreader or hard drive as the deviceor your files may be damaged.

Do not connect your USB flashmemory device using a hub.

Do not use an extension cable tothe USB adapter cable equippedwith your vehicle.

Do not keep a USB flash memorydevice in the vehicle. Directsunlight and high heat will damageit.

Depending on the type andnumber of files, it may take sometime before they begin to play.

Depending on the software thefiles were made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, ordisplay some text data.

Depending on the type ofencoding and writing softwareused, there may be cases wherecharacter information does notdisplay properly.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing a USB flashmemory device.



202

NOTE:

10/09/02 14:07:18 31TM8610_207

CONTINUED


When the USB flash memory deviceis connected, the USB indicator isshown in the display.

Connect the USB flash memorydevice to the USB connectorcorrectly and securely.

1. 2.

Connecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice


eatures

203

USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE USB ADAPTER CABLE

10/09/02 14:07:24 31TM8610_208

－＋

－

－

＞

Use the SKIP button while a USBflash memory device is playing tochange files.

Each time you press the(SKIP ) button, the system

skips forward to the beginning of thenext file. Press the (SKIP )button, to skip backward to thebeginning of the current file. Press itagain to skip to the beginning of theprevious file.

To move rapidly within a file, pressand hold either side ( or )of the SKIP button.

Each time you press the TITLEbutton, the display mode shows youin sequence, the folder name, the filename, the artist name, the albumname, the song name, or name off(which turns off the text display).

The display shows up to 16characters of the selected data. If thetext data has more than 16characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold theTITLE button until the next 16characters are shown.

Toselect a different folder, press the

button or button.Press the button to skip tothe next folder, and press the

button to skip to thebeginning of the previous folder.

To Change or Select FilesText Data Display Function

SKIP

FOLDER SELECTION


204

10/09/02 14:07:35 31TM8610_209

CONTINUED

You can also select a folder or file byusing the VOL/SELECT knob. Pushthe VOL/SELECT knob to switchthe display to the folder or file list,then turn the VOL/SELECT knob toselect a folder or file. Press theVOL/SELECT knob to set yourselection.

You can select any type of repeat,random and scan modes by using theRPT button, RDM button, or SCANbutton.

Pressing the button goes backto the previous display and pressingthe TITLE button cancels thissetting mode.

To Select a File from Folder and FileLists

To Select Repeat, Random or ScanMode:


eatures

205

Folder Selection

Track Selection

Press theVOL/SELECT knob.

10/09/02 14:07:42 31TM8610_210

－－－This featurecontinuously plays a file. To activatethe repeat feature, press the RPTbutton. You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in thedisplay. To turn it off, press and holdthe RPT button.

This featurereplays all the files in the selectedfolder in the order they are stored.To activate the folder repeat feature,press the RPT button repeatedly.You will see ‘‘F-RPT’’ in the display.To turn it off, press and hold theRPT button.


This feature plays allthe files in random order. To activatethe track random feature, press theRDM button. You will see ‘‘RDM’’ inthe display. To turn it off, press andhold the RDM button.

REPEAT FOLDER REPEAT RANDOM


206

10/09/02 14:07:47 31TM8610_211

－－－

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom file scan to folder scan, then tonormal play.

This featuresamples the first file in each folder inthe order they are stored. Toactivate the folder scan feature,press the SCAN button repeatedly.You will see ‘‘F-SCAN’’ in the display.You will get a 10 second sampling ofthe first file in each folder. Press andhold the SCAN button to get out ofthe folder scan mode and play thelast file sampled.

This feature samples allfiles in the current folder in theorder they are stored. To activatethe scan feature, press the SCANbutton. You will see ‘‘SCAN’’ in thedisplay. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each file in the folder.Press and hold the SCAN button toget out of the scan mode and playthe last file sampled.

Thisfeature plays the files in the currentfolder in random order. To activatethe folder random feature, press theRDM button repeatedly. You will see‘‘F-RDM’’ in the display. To turn itoff, press and hold the RDM button.

Each time you press the RDMbutton, the mode changes from trackrandom, play to folder random play,then to normal play.

FOLDER SCANSCANFOLDER RANDOM


eatures

207

10/09/02 14:07:52 31TM8610_212

To play the radio when a USB flashmemory device is playing, press theFM/AM button. If a disc is in theaudio unit, press the CD button toplay the disc.

You can disconnect the USB flashmemory device at any time even ifthe USB mode is selected on theaudio system. Always follow the USBflash memory device’s instructionswhen you remove it.

When you disconnect the USB flashmemory device while it is playing,the display shows ‘‘USB NO DATA.’’

If you reconnect the same USB flashmemory device, the system willbegin playing where it left off.

To Stop Playing a USB FlashMemory Device

Disconnecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice


208

10/09/02 14:07:57 31TM8610_213

If you see an error message on theaudio display while playing a USBflash memory device, find thesolution in the chart to the right. Ifyou cannot clear the error message,take your vehicle to your dealer.


USB ROM Error


Use of unsupportedfiles

No files in USB flashmemory device

Use of unsupportedUSB flash memorydevice


Appears when the files in the USB flashmemory device are DRM or an unsupportedformat. This error message appears for about 3seconds, then plays the next song.Appears when the USB flash memory device isempty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC filesin the USB flash memory device. Save someMP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flashmemory device.Appears when an unsupported device isconnected. See page 201 for the specificationinformation for the USB flash memory device.If it appears when the supported device isconnected, reconnect the device.

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (U.S. LX model and EX model without navigation system)F

eatures

209



UNPLAYABLEFILE

USB NO SONG

UNSUPPORTED

10/09/02 14:08:03 31TM8610_214

Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX model with navigation system)

210

TUNE BAR

SCAN BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

AM/FM BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB FM1 ICON SOUND ICONAM ICON

BACK GROUND ICONAUTO SELECT ICONFM2 ICON

10/09/02 14:08:07 31TM8610_215

－

▲ ▼

▼

▲

You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Use thecontrol buttons on the left side of thescreen. The status bar appears onthe bottom of the screen each timeyou operate any of the controlbuttons. On the navigation screen,you can also see audio informationby touching the AUDIO INFO iconon the lower half of the screen.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton, or touch the desired bandicon (FM1, FM2, or AM). On the FMband, STEREO will be displayed ifthe station is broadcasting in stereo.Stereo reproduction on AM is notavailable.


Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the side of the bar to tuneto a higher frequency, and press the

side to tune to a lowerfrequency.

Press and hold the or side ofthe TUNE bar until you hear twobeeps to change the frequencyrapidly. Release the bar when thedisplay reaches the desiredfrequency.

Turn the system on by pushing thepower/volume knob or the AM/FMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe power/volume knob.

Pushing the AUDIO button will alsoturn on the system.

In addition to the standard audiocontrols, the audio system in yourvehicle can be operated using thevoice control system. See thenavigation system manual forcomplete details.

CONTINUED

Voice Control System To Select a Station

TUNE

To Play the AM/FM Radio

Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX model with navigation system)F

eatures

211

10/09/02 14:08:16 31TM8610_216

－

▲ ▼

－

－The seek functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press and hold the or side ofthe TUNE bar until you hear a beep,then release it.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.When the system finds a strongsignal, it will stop and play thatstation for about 10 seconds.

Each preset button’s frequency isshown on the bottom of the audiodisplay.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.


Select the desired band, AM orFM.


Pick a preset button, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.


1.

2.

3.

4.

SEEK

SCAN

Preset


212

10/09/02 14:08:23 31TM8610_217

－ If you aretraveling and can no longer receiveyour preset stations, you can use theauto select feature to find stations inthe local area.

Press the AUDIO button to view theaudio control icons, then touch theAUTO SEL icon. You will see AUTOSEL flashing in the display, and thesystem goes into scan mode forseveral seconds. It stores thefrequencies of six AM, and twelveFM stations in the preset buttons.

You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

touch theAUTO SEL icon. This restores thepresets you originally set.

For information on FM/AM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.

You can adjust the sound on thenavigation screen. To adjust thesound, push the AUDIO button, thenenter the sound grid by touching theSOUND icon on the display.

258

To turn off Auto Select,

CONTINUED

AUTO SELECT Adjusting the Sound


eatures

213

SOUND ICON

10/09/02 14:08:31 31TM8610_218

－

－

－

－－

Adjusts the bass.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound. To adjust thefront/rear fader, touch the FR or RRicon.

Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound. To adjustthe left/right balance, touch the L orR icon.

The right upper display shows youthe current setting of the soundstrength coming from each speaker.

The SVC modecontrols the volume based on vehiclespeed. The faster you go, the louderthe audio volume becomes. As youslow down, the audio volumedecreases. Touch the appropriateicon (Low, Mid, Hi, Off) to select themode.

If you feel the sound is too loud,choose low. If you feel the sound istoo quiet, choose Hi.

Adjusts the treble. Toadjust the treble and bass, toucheither or on the treble orbass adjustment bar. The adjustmentbar on the lower right display showsyou the current setting.

You can also select the icon with thejoystick. Move it up and down tomove the highlighting and scrollthrough lists. Select the icon, thenenter the joystick.


BASS

FADER

BALANCE

SVC (speed-sensitive volumecompensation)

TREBLE


214

SPEAKER SETTING

BASS/TREBLE SETTING

10/09/02 14:08:40 31TM8610_219

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the control panel (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

You can select the backgroundscreen to display the sound level.There are three screen modes: level(the sound level is shown with thevertical bars), spectrum analysis (thesound level appears as ripples ofwater), and off. Each time you touchthe background icon, the displaychanges.

121

Audio System LightingScreen Mode


eatures

215

10/09/02 14:08:44 31TM8610_220

－

＋

Playing a Disc (EX model with navigation system)

216

SCAN BUTTON

JOYSTICK

AUDIO BUTTON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

OPEN BUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON REWIND BUTTON

FAST FORWARDBUTTON

TUNE BAR

CD ICON

CD/AUX BUTTON

SKIP BUTTON

SKIP BUTTON

10/09/02 14:08:49 31TM8610_221

You operate the in-dash disc playerwith the same controls used for theradio.

This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA formats. Whenplaying a disc in MP3, you will see‘‘MP3’’ on the screen. In WMAformat, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear on thescreen. You can select up to 255folders and play up to 999 tracks. Ifthe disc has a complex structure, ittakes a while to read the disc beforethe system begins to play it.

If you have a disc that is acombination of CD-DA tracks andMP3/WMA files, you can choose theformat to listen to by pressing andholding the CD/AUX button.

CONTINUED

To Play a Disc(In-dash single player)

Playing a Disc (EX model with navigation system)F

eatures

217


10/09/02 14:08:55 31TM8610_222

Video CDs and DVD discs will notwork in this unit.

A disc compressed in AAC formatcannot be played in this audiosystem.


If an MP3 or WMA file isprotected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audio unitdisplays FILE ERROR, and thenskips to the next file.


218

NOTE:

10/09/02 14:08:59 31TM8610_223

The in-dash disc player is behind thenavigation screen. To use the discplayer, press the OPEN buttonbeside the screen. The screen foldsback, and the disc slot appears.

Insert a disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way and begin toplay it.


To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button onthe edge of the screen panel. Do notuse the folded down screen as a tray.If you put a cup, for example, on thescreen, the liquid inside the cup mayspill on the screen when you go overa bump.

CONTINUED

To Load a Disc


eatures

219

DISC SLOT CLOSE BUTTON

OPEN BUTTON

10/09/02 14:09:07 31TM8610_224

－

－

Press the AUDIO button beside thescreen to show the audio display andoperate the in-dash disc player.

You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Press theCD/AUX button. The status barappears on the bottom of the screen.On the navigation screen, you cansee the audio information wheneveryou touch the AUDIO INFO orTRACK LIST icons on the lower halfof the screen.

When playing a CD recorded withtext data, the track, album, and artistname are shown on the audio display.When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA,the folder number and name, the filenumber and name, the artist name,and the elapsed time are shown. Thesystem will continuously play a discuntil you change modes. If the discwas not recorded with text data, itwill not be displayed.

You can use the preset buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks (files in MP3 orWMA mode). Each preset button’sfunction is shown on the bottom ofthe screen.

You can also select an icon with thejoystick. Move it to left, right, up, ordown to change the highlighting andscroll through lists. Then press ENTon the top of the joystick to selectthe icon.

Each time you press andrelease (preset 6 button), theplayer skips forward to thebeginning of the next track (file inMP3 or WMA mode). Press andrelease (preset 5 button), toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current track. Press it again toskip to the beginning of the previoustrack.

To move rapidly withina track/file, press and hold

(preset 4 button) or(preset 3 button).


SKIP

FF/REW


220

PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION

PRESET BUTTONS

10/09/02 14:09:17 31TM8610_225

－－－

▲▼

In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA modeThis feature,

when activated, replays all files onthe selected folder in the order theyare compressed. To activate folderrepeat, press and hold the RPTbutton (preset 1 button) for 2seconds. You will see FOLDERREPEAT in the display. The systemcontinuously replays the currentfolder. Press the RPT button again toturn it off. Selecting a differentfolder with the TUNE bar also turnsoff folder repeat.

To continuously replaya track (file in MP3 or WMA mode),press and release the RPT button(preset 1 button). You will seeTRACK REPEAT in the display.Press the RPT button again to turn itoff.

Toselect a different folder, press eitherside of the TUNE bar to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Pressthe side of the TUNE bar to skipto the next folder, and the side tomove to the beginning of the currentfolder. Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous folder.

CONTINUED

FOLDER REPEATTRACK REPEAT (FILEREPEAT)FOLDER SELECTION


eatures

221

10/09/02 14:09:23 31TM8610_226

－－－

Thisfeature plays the tracks/files withina disc in random order. To activatetrack random, press and release theRDM button (preset 2 button). Youwill see TRACK RANDOM in thedisplay. Press the RDM button againto return to normal play.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays allfiles in the selected folder in randomorder, rather than in the order theyare compressed. To activate folderrandom, press and hold the RDMbutton. You will see FOLDERRANDOM in the display. Thesystem then selects and plays filesrandomly. This continues until youdeactivate folder random by pressingthe RDM button again, or if youselect a different folder with theTUNE bar.

The scan function samples all tracks(files in MP3 or WMA) in the orderthey were recorded. To activate scan,press and release the SCAN button.You will see TRACK SCAN in thedisplay. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each track/file on thedisc. Press the SCAN button to getout of scan mode and play the lasttrack/file sampled.

Pressing either SKIP button (preset5 button or 6 button) also turns offscan.

In MP3 or WMA modeTRACK RANDOM (Randomwithin a disc/folder) FOLDER RANDOM

SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)


222

10/09/02 14:09:29 31TM8610_227

－

CONTINUED

You can also select a track/filedirectly from a track list on the audiodisplay. Press the AUDIO button toshow the audio display, then touchthe Track List icon. The track listmenu appears on the display.

This feature,when activated, samples all the firstfiles in each folder on the disc inorder. To activate folder scan, pressand hold the SCAN button for 2seconds. You will see ‘‘FOLDERSCAN’’ in the display.

The system plays the first file ineach folder for about 10 seconds. Ifyou do nothing, the system thenplays the first file in each folder for10 seconds each. After playing thefirst file of the last folder, the systemgoes to normal play.

Pressing either SKIP button (preset5 button or 6 button), selecting adifferent folder with the TUNE bar,or pressing the SCAN button, alsoturns off folder scan.

In MP3 or WMA mode Using a Track ListFOLDER SCAN


eatures

223

TRACK/FILE ICON

FOLDER NUMBER RETURN ICON

FOLDER ICON

10/09/02 14:09:36 31TM8610_228

▲ ▼

When playing a CD recorded withtext data, each track name is shownon the audio display. With a discrecorded in MP3 or WMA, the foldernumber and the location are alsodisplayed.

If the disc was not recorded with textdata, only the track number is shown.

To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon on thescreen.

Select the desired track/file bytouching the icon on the display. Theselected icon will be highlighted inblue. The system begins to play theselected track/file. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, touch the folder iconon the upper left of the screen tomove to the parent folder. Thecurrent folder is highlighted in blue.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM/FM button ortouch the FM1, FM2, or AM icon. Ifa PC card is in the audio unit, touchthe CARD icon to play the PC card.Press the CD/AUX button again ortouch the CD icon to switch back tothe in-dash disc player.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the disc willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the disc will beginplaying where it left off.



224

10/09/02 14:09:42 31TM8610_229

To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button.

You cannot close the screen if a discis partially inserted into its slot.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

For information on how to handleand protect discs, see page .

To remove a disc from the audio unit,fold back the screen by pressing theOPEN button (see page ). Pressthe disc eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadit after 10 seconds and put it in pausemode. To begin playing, press theCD/AUX button.

219260

Removing a Disc Protecting Discs


eatures

225

10/09/02 14:09:48 31TM8610_230

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.

Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

SolutionCauseError Message

Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Make sure it is inserted correctly in the discplayer. Make sure the disc is not scratched ordamaged.Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation. Ifthe disc cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your dealer.Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

Disc Format Error

High Temperature

Disc Player Error Messages (EX model with navigation system)

226

CHECK DISC

MECH ERROR

CHECK DISC

HEAT ERROR

10/09/02 14:09:55 31TM8610_231

＋

－

Playing a PC card (EX model with navigation system)F

eatures

227

REPEAT BUTTON

SKIP BUTTONFAST FORWARDBUTTON

REWIND BUTTON

JOYSTICK

PLAY MODEICON

TRACK LIST ICON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

RANDOM BUTTON

SKIP BUTTON

PC CARD ICON

TUNE BAR

SCAN BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON

OPEN BUTTON

10/09/02 14:10:00 31TM8610_232

You operate the PC card player withthe same controls used for the radioand the in-dash disc player. To loador play a card, the ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position.

Based on PCMCIA 2.1/JEIDA 4.2,the recommended PC cards for thePC card reader are:

CompactFlashFlash ATA

SD memory card

Always use the recommendedmemory card with the appropriateadapter (if an adapter is needed).Some memory cards will not work inthis unit.

The PC card player reads and playscards in MP3 or WMA formats.Depending on the format, the screenwill indicate ‘‘MP3’’ or ‘‘WMA’’ whena card is playing. The card limit ofthe player is 255 folders and 999tracks. If the card has a complexstructure, it takes some time for thesystem to begin playing it.

To Play a PC Card

Playing a PC card (EX model with navigation system)

228

10/09/02 14:10:05 31TM8610_233

When you insert a PC card intothe slot, make sure you put it instraight. If you cannot insert it,remove it, and insert again.

Do not keep PC cards in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage them.

To avoid damaging the cardreader, do not insert hard discdrive cards into the PC card slot.

You cannot close the screen(move it to the upright position)until the PC card is inserted all theway into its slot or removed.

Never insert foreign objects intothe PC card slot.


In WMA format, DRM (digital rightsmanagement) files cannot be played.If the system finds a DRM file, itskips that file and plays the nextavailable folder or file.

CONTINUED


eatures

229

NOTE:

10/09/02 14:10:12 31TM8610_234

The PC card slot is behind thenavigation screen. To use the PCcard player, press the OPEN buttonbeside the screen. The screen foldsback, and the PC card slot appears.

Insert a PC card straight into the slot.The drive will read the PC card andbegin to play it.

Return the screen to the uprightposition by pressing the CLOSEbutton on the edge of the screenpanel.

Press the AUDIO button beside thescreen to show the audio display andoperate the PC card player.

You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Press anyof the appropriate control buttons.The status bar appears on thebottom of the screen. On thenavigation screen, you can see theaudio information whenever youtouch the AUDIO INFO icon on thescreen.

Loading a PC Card


230

PC CARD SLOT

10/09/02 14:10:18 31TM8610_235

Artist mode plays tracks inalphabetical order, by artist andsong title.

There are three play modes: Folder,Artist, and Album. Touch the PLAYMODE icon, then choose one of themodes by touching its icon. When amode is selected, it is highlighted inblue.

Folder mode plays tracks in theorder they were added to the card.

Album mode plays albums(folders) in alphabetical order.

If play mode information was notincluded in the tracks/files whenthey were added to the card, it willnot be displayed on the screen.

CONTINUED

To select a play mode


eatures

231

MODE INDICATOR

PLAY MODE ICON

PLAY MODE ICON PLAY MODE ICON

MODE INDICATOR MODE INDICATOR

FOLDER MODE

ARTIST MODE ALBUM MODE

10/09/02 14:10:26 31TM8610_236

To select a play mode, push theAUDIO button to show the audiodisplay, then touch the PLAY MODEicon on the display.

Select the desired mode by touchingthe appropriate icon, or move thejoystick, then press ENT.

After you select the play mode, thedisplay changes to the selectableplaying menu. If you select‘‘Continue playing the current song,’’the system goes into the selectedplay mode after playing the currentfile.


232

PLAY MODE ICON

10/09/02 14:10:33 31TM8610_237

－

－

You can use the preset buttons whilea card is playing to select or changefiles. Each preset button’s function isshown on the bottom of the screen.

To go back to the previous screen,press the CANCEL button on theright side of the screen. To exit theplay mode screens, press the AUDIObutton.

If you select ‘‘Play a new track list,’’the system goes into the selectedplay mode immediately and begins toplay the new track list.

Icons on the screen can also beselected with the joystick. Move thejoystick left or right and up or downuntil the icon is highlighted, thenpress ENT on the top of the joystickto select the icon.

Each time you press andrelease (preset 6 button), theplayer skips forward to thebeginning of the next file. Press andrelease (preset 5 button), toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current file. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previous file.

To move rapidly withina file, press and hold (preset 4button) or (preset 3 button).

CONTINUED

To Change or Select Tracks/Files SKIP

FF/REW


eatures

233

PRESET BUTTONS

PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION

10/09/02 14:10:42 31TM8610_238

－

▲▼

－

－－To

select a different folder, press eitherside of the TUNE bar to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Pressthe side of the TUNE bar to skipto the next folder, and the side tomove to the beginning of the currentfolder. Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous folder.

To continuously replaya file, press the RPT button (preset 1button). You will see ‘‘TRACKREPEAT’’ in the display. Press theRPT button again to turn it off.

This feature, whenactivated, replays all the files on theselected folder/artist/album in theorder they are recorded or listed. Toactivate each repeat mode, press andhold the RPT button (preset 1button) for 2 seconds. You will seeFOLDER REPEAT, ARTISTREPEAT or ALBUM REPEAT in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current folder/artist/album. Press and hold the RPTbutton again to turn it off. Pressingthe RDM button, or selecting adifferent folder/artist/album withthe TUNE bar also turns off therepeat feature.

This featureplays the files within a folder inrandom order. To activate randomplay, press and release the RDMbutton (preset 2 button). You will seeTRACK RANDOM in the display.Press the RDM button again toreturn to normal play.

FOLDER SELECTION

TRACK REPEAT (FILEREPEAT)

FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUMREPEAT

TRACK RANDOM (Randomwithin a folder)


234

10/09/02 14:10:46 31TM8610_239

－－－

The SCAN functionsamples all the files on the PC cardin the order they are recorded. Toactivate the scan feature, press andrelease the SCAN button. You willsee TRACK SCAN in the display.You will get a 10 second sampling ofeach file on the PC card. Press theSCAN button again to get out of scanmode and play the last file sampled.

Pressing either of the SKIP buttons(preset 5 button or 6 button) alsoturns off the scan feature.

This feature, whenactivated, plays all files in eachfolder/artist/album in random order,rather than in the order they arerecorded or listed. To activate eachrandom play, push and hold theRDM button (preset 2 button) for 2seconds. You will see ‘‘FOLDERRANDOM, ARTIST RANDOM orALBUM RANDOM’’ in the display.

The system then selects and playsfiles randomly. This continues untilyou deactivate each random play bypressing the RDM button again.

This feature, whenactivated, samples the first file ineach folder/artist/album on the PCcard in order. To activate each scanfeature, press and hold the SCANbutton. You will see ‘‘FOLDERSCAN, ARTIST SCAN or ALBUMSCAN’’ in the display.

The system plays the first file in thefolder for about 10 seconds. If you donothing, the system plays the firstfile in each folder, in order, for 10seconds each. After playing the firstfile of the last folder/artist/album,the system returns to normal play.

Pressing either of the SKIP buttons(preset 5 button or 6 button),selecting a different folder/artist/album with the TUNE bar, orpressing the SCAN button, also turnsoff the scan feature.

CONTINUED

SCANFOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUMRANDOM

FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUMSCAN


eatures

235

10/09/02 14:10:53 31TM8610_240

▲ ▼To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon.

You can also select a file directlyfrom a track list on the audio display.Press the AUDIO button to show theaudio display, then touch the TrackList icon. The track list menuappears on the display. To play a file, touch its icon on the

screen. In folder mode, touch thefolder icon on the upper left of thescreen to move to the parent folder.The current folder is highlighted inblue.

In artist mode, the artist name is alsodisplayed on the right side of eachselectable icon. Select the desiredfile.

Using a Track List


236

RETURN ICON

FOLDER ICON

TRACK LIST ICON

ARTIST NAME

10/09/02 14:11:01 31TM8610_241

In album mode, the album name isalso displayed on the right side ofeach selectable icon. Select thedesired file.

When you select ‘‘Song Search’’ fromthe track list display, the song searchmenu appears.

You can then select any of threemodes to search a file: Title byKeyword, Artist, and Album.

CONTINUED

Song Search Function


eatures

237

RETURN ICON

ALBUM NAME

Folder mode is shown.

SONG SEARCH ICON TITLE BY KEYWORD ICON

ARTIST ICON ALBUM ICON

10/09/02 14:11:09 31TM8610_242

▲ ▼

Searching for a Song Title by Keyword

In Title by Keyword mode, enter thetitle name, or any keyword, bytouching the letter icons on thescreen. Press the List icon to beginthe song search. If you press theCANCEL button on the control panel,the display returns to the modemenu without doing a search.

To cancel the selected letter, touchthe Delete icon. To select morecharacters, touch the More icon.The other character list will beshown.

After the system searches for a song,a file list is displayed. To scrollthrough the list, touch the oricon on the side of the screen. Selectthe desired file by touching theappropriate icon, or moving thejoystick and pressing ENT.


238

DELETE ICON LIST ICON

FILE LIST

MORE ICON

10/09/02 14:11:16 31TM8610_243

Searching for a Song by Artist Name Searching for a Song by Album Name

Select the Artist icon, and the artistlist appears. Select the desired artist,and the artist’s file list is displayed.

Select the Album icon, and thealbum list appears. Select the desiredalbum, and its song list is displayed.You can then select the desired songfrom the list.

To play the radio when a PC card isplaying, press the AM/FM button ortouch the FM1, FM2, or AM icon. Ifa disc is in the audio unit, press theCD/AUX button or touch the CDicon to play the disc. Touch theCARD icon to switch back to the PCcard player.

If you turn the system off while a PCcard is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the card willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the card will beginplaying where it left off.

When you leave the vehicle, alwaysremove the PC card from the audiounit.

CONTINUED

To Stop Playing a PC Card


eatures

239

ARTIST LIST ALBUM LIST

10/09/02 14:11:25 31TM8610_244

To remove a PC card from the audiounit, fold back the screen bypressing the OPEN button (see page

). Press the eject button ( )to remove the card. If you do notremove it from the slot, you cannotreturn the screen to the uprightposition.

To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button.

You can also eject a card when theignition switch is off.

If there is a problem with the PCcard player, see your dealer.

219

Removing a PC Card PC Card Player Malfunction


240

10/09/02 14:11:30 31TM8610_245

＋

－

Playing an iPod (EX model with navigation system)F

eatures

241

USB ICON

SKIP BUTTON

iPod INDICATOR

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

JOYSTICK

AUDIO BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

SKIP BUTTON

10/09/02 14:11:35 31TM8610_246

Do not connect your iPod using ahub.

Do not keep the iPod in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage it.

Do not use an extension cablebetween the USB adapter cableequipped with your vehicle andyour dock connector.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing it.


iPod models confirmed to becompatible with your audio systemusing the USB adapter cable are:

This system may not work with allsoftware versions of these devices.

This audio system can play the audiofiles on the iPod with the samecontrols used for the in-dash discplayer. To play an iPod, connect it tothe USB adapter cable in the consolecompartment by using your dockconnector, then press the CD/AUXbutton. The ignition switch must bein the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position. The iPod will also berecharged with the ignition switch inthese positions.

The system will only play songsstored on the iPod with iTunes.

iPod and iTunes are registeredtrademarks owned by Apple Inc.

ModeliPod classic (80/160 G)iPod classic (120 G)iPod with video (iPod 5th generation)iPod nanoiPod nano 2nd generationiPod nano 3rd generationiPod nano 4th generationiPod nano 5th generationiPod touchiPod touch 2nd generation

Playing an iPod (EX model with navigation system)

To Play an iPod

242

NOTE:

10/09/02 14:11:44 31TM8610_247


Connect your dock connector tothe iPod correctly and securely.

Install the dock connector to theUSB adapter cable securely.

If the audio system still does notrecognize the iPod, the iPod mayneed to be reset. Follow theinstructions that came with youriPod, or you can find resetinstructions online at

The current file number and total ofthe selected playable files aredisplayed on the screen. It alsoshows the artist, album and track(file) names on the screen.

1. 2.

3.

www.apple.com/itunes/

CONTINUED

Connecting an iPod


eatures

243

DOCK CONNECTOR

USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

10/09/02 14:11:51 31TM8610_248

－＋

－

You can also select a file from anylist on the iPod menu: playlists,artists, albums and songs. Press theAUDIO button to display the screen,then touch the iPod MENU icon.

Select the desired mode by touchingthe appropriate icon, or move thejoystick, then press ENT.

Use the SKIP button while an iPod isplaying to change files.

Each time you press theSKIP button (Preset 6 button),the system skips forward to thebeginning of the next file. Press theSKIP button (Preset 5 button), toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current file. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previous file.

If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on either theartists or albums list, all availablefiles on the selected list are played.

To Select a File from iPod MenuTo Change or Select Files

SKIP


244

10/09/02 14:11:59 31TM8610_249

▲ ▼

Press the AUDIO button to go backto the normal audio playing display.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen, andpressing the MAP button cancels theaudio control display on the screen.

You can also select a file directlyfrom a track list on the audio display.Press the AUDIO button to show theaudio display, then touch the TrackList icon. The track list menuappears on the display.

To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon.

To play a file, touch its icon on thescreen. The current folder ishighlighted in blue.

CONTINUED

Using a Track List


eatures

245

RETURN ICONTRACK LIST ICON

10/09/02 14:12:06 31TM8610_250

－－You can select any type of repeat andrandom mode by using the RPTbutton or RDM button.

This featurecontinuously plays a file. To activatethe repeat feature, press the RPTbutton (Preset 1 button). You willsee ‘‘REPEAT’’ in the display. Toturn it off, press the RPT button(Preset 1 button) again.

This featureplays all available files from theselected items in the iPod menu list(playlists, artists, albums or songs)in random order. To activate thetrack random feature, press theRDM button (Preset 2 button). Youwill see ‘‘TRACK RANDOM’’ in thedisplay. To turn it off, press theRDM button (Preset 2 button).

To Select Repeat or Random Mode: REPEAT TRACK RANDOM


246

10/09/02 14:12:11 31TM8610_251

－＊

＊

This featureplays all available albums from theselected items in the iPod menu list(playlists, artists, albums or songs)in random order. The files in eachalbum are played in the recordedorder. To activate the album randomfeature, press and hold the RDMbutton (Preset 2 button). You willsee ‘‘ALBUM RANDOM’’ in thedisplay. To turn it off, press and holdthe RDM button (Preset 2 button).

You can also select another list fromthe iPod menu while keeping therandom function.

Available operating functions varieson models or versions. Somefunctions may not be available on thevehicle’s audio system.

Press the CD/AUX button again ortouch the AUX icon to switch back tothe iPod.

You can disconnect the iPod at anytime when you see the ‘‘OK todisconnect’’ message in the iPoddisplay. Always make sure you seethe ‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message inthe iPod display before youdisconnect it. Make sure to followthe iPod’s instructions on how todisconnect the dock connector fromthe USB adapter cable.

The displayed message mayvary on models or versions. Onsome models, there is nomessage to disconnect.

When you disconnect the iPod whileit is playing, the navigation screenshows ‘‘NO DATA.’’

If you reconnect the same iPod, thesystem may begin playing where itleft off, depending on what mode theiPod is in when it is reconnected.

If you see an error message on thescreen, see page .

To play the radio when an iPod isplaying, press the FM/AM button ortouch the FM1, FM2, or AM icon. Ifa disc is in the audio unit, press theCD/AUX button or touch the CDicon to play the disc. If a PC card isin the audio unit, press the CD/AUXbutton or touch the CARD icon toplay a PC card.

:

248

ALBUM RANDOM To Stop Playing Your iPod

iPod Error MessagesDisconnecting an iPod


eatures

247

NOTE:

10/09/02 14:12:21 31TM8610_252

If you see an error message on thescreen while playing an iPod, findthe solution in the chart to the right.If you cannot clear the errormessage, take your vehicle to yourdealer.


USB ROM Error


No files in iPod

Use of unsupportediPod

Recognition failure ofiPod


Appears when the iPod is empty. Store somefiles in the iPod.Appears when an unsupported iPod isconnected. See page 242 for the specificationinformation for iPods. If it appears when asupported iPod is connected, update the iPodsoftware to the newer version.Appears when the system dose notacknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

iPod Error Messages (EX model with navigation system)

248



iPod NO SONG

UNSUPPORTEDVER.

CONNECT RETRY

10/09/02 14:12:25 31TM8610_253

－

＋

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (EX model with navigation system)F

eatures

249

AUDIO BUTTON

USB ICON

SKIP BUTTON

SKIP BUTTON

JOYSTICK

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

CD/AUX BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

TUNE FOLDERBAR

WMA/MP3 INDICATOR

10/09/02 14:12:29 31TM8610_254

＊

＊

This audio system can operate theaudio files on a USB flash memorydevice with the same controls usedfor the in-dash disc player. To play aUSB flash memory device, connect itto the USB adapter cable in theconsole compartment, then press theCD/AUX button.

The recommended USB flashmemory devices are 256 MB orhigher, and formatted with the FATfile system. Some digital audioplayers may be compatible as well.Some USB flash memory devices(such as devices with security lock-out features, etc.) will not work inthis audio unit.

The audio system reads and playsthe audio files on the USB flashmemory device in MP3, WMA orAAC formats. Depending on theformat, the display shows MP3,WMA or AAC when a USB flashmemory device is playing. The USBflash memory device limit is up to700 folders or up to 65535 files.

Only AAC format files recordedwith iTunes are playable on thisaudio unit.

:

To Play a USB Flash MemoryDevice

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (EX model with navigation system)

250

10/09/02 14:12:34 31TM8610_255

Do not use a device such as a cardreader or hard drive as the deviceor your files may be damaged.

Do not connect your USB flashmemory device using a hub.

Do not use an extension cable tothe USB adapter cable equippedwith your vehicle.

Do not keep a USB flash memorydevice in the vehicle. Directsunlight and high heat will damageit.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing a USB flashmemory device.


Depending on the type andnumber of files, it may take sometime before they begin to play.


Depending on the type ofencoding and writing softwareused, there may be cases wherecharacter information does notdisplay properly.

CONTINUED


eatures

251

NOTE:

10/09/02 14:12:42 31TM8610_256

Some versions of MP3, WMA, orAAC format may not be supported. Ifan unsupported file is found, theaudio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,then skips to the next file.


In WMA or AAC format, DRM(digital rights management) filescannot be played. If the system findsa DRM file, the audio unit displaysUNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skipsto the next file.

Connect the USB flash memorydevice to the USB connectorcorrectly and securely.

When the USB flash memory deviceis connected and the USB mode isselected on the audio system, theWMA or MP3 indicator is shown onthe navigation screen. It also showsthe folder and file numbers, and theelapsed time on the screen.

1. 2.

Connecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice


252

USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

10/09/02 14:12:48 31TM8610_257

－＋

－

－

▲▼

▲ ▼

CONTINUED

Use the SKIP button while a USBflash memory device is playing tochange files.

Each time you press theSKIP button (Preset 6 button),the system skips forward to thebeginning of the next file. Press theSKIP button (Preset 5 button), toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current file. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previous file.

Toselect a different folder, press eitherside of the TUNE FOLDER bar.Press the side to skip to the nextfolder, and press the side to skipto the beginning of the previousfolder.

You can also select a file directlyfrom a track list on the audio display.Press the AUDIO button to show theaudio display, then touch the TrackList icon. The track list menuappears on the display.

To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon.

To play a file, touch its icon on thescreen. The current folder ishighlighted in blue.

To Change or Select Files Using a Track List

SKIP

FOLDER SELECTION


eatures

253

TRACK LIST ICON

FOLDER ICON

RETURN ICON

10/09/02 14:12:57 31TM8610_258

－－

You can select any type of repeat,random and scan modes by using theRPT button or RDM button, orSCAN button.

This featurecontinuously plays a file. To activatethe track repeat feature, press theRPT button (Preset 1 button). Youwill see ‘‘TRACK REPEAT’’ in thedisplay. To turn it off, press the RPTbutton (Preset 1 button).

This featurereplays all the files in the selectedfolder in the order they are stored.To activate the folder repeat feature,press and hold the RPT button(Preset 1 button). You will see‘‘FOLDER REPEAT’’ in the display.To turn it off, press and hold theRPT button (Preset 1 button).

To Select Repeat, Random or ScanMode:

TRACK REPEAT FOLDER REPEAT


254

10/09/02 14:13:02 31TM8610_259

－－－This featureplays all the files in random order.To activate the track random feature,press the RDM button (Preset 2button). You will see ‘‘TRACKRANDOM’’ in the display. To turn itoff, press the RDM button (Preset 2button).

Thisfeature plays the files in the selectedfolder in random order. To activatethe folder random feature, press andhold the RDM button (Preset 2button). You will see ‘‘FOLDERRANDOM’’ in the display. To turn itoff, press and hold the RDM button(Preset 2 button).

This featuresamples all files in the selectedfolder in the order they are stored.To activate the scan feature, pressthe SCAN button. You will see‘‘TRACK SCAN’’ in the display. Youwill also see the file number blinking.You will get a 10 second sampling ofeach file in the folder. Press theSCAN button to get out of the scanmode. The system plays the last filesampled.

CONTINUED

TRACK RANDOM FOLDER RANDOM TRACK SCAN


eatures

255

10/09/02 14:13:06 31TM8610_260

－

To play the radio when a USB flashmemory device is playing, press theFM/AM button or touch the FM1,FM2, or AM icon. If a disc is in theaudio unit, press the CD/AUXbutton or touch the CD icon to playthe disc. If a PC card is in the audiounit, Press the CD/AUX button ortouch the CARD icon to play a PCcard.

Press the CD/AUX button again ortouch the AUX icon to switch back tothe USB flash memory device.

You can disconnect the USB flashmemory device at any time even ifthe USB mode is selected on theaudio system. Always follow the USBflash memory device’s instructionswhen you remove it.

When you disconnect the USB flashmemory device while it is playing,the navigation screen shows ‘‘NODATA.’’

If you reconnect the same USB flashmemory device, the system willbegin playing where it left off.

This featuresamples the first file in each folder inthe order they are stored. Toactivate the folder scan feature,press and hold the SCAN button.You will see ‘‘FOLDER SCAN’’ in thedisplay. You will also see the foldernumber blinking. You will get a 10second sampling of the first file ineach folder. Press the SCAN buttonto get out of the scan mode. Thesystem plays the last file sampled.

To Stop Playing a USB FlashMemory Device

FOLDER SCAN Disconnecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice


256

10/09/02 14:13:13 31TM8610_261

If you see an error message on thescreen while playing a USB flashmemory device, find the solution inthe chart to the right. If you cannotclear the error message, take yourvehicle to your dealer.


USB ROM Error


Use of unsupportedfiles

No files in USB flashmemory device

Use of unsupportedUSB flash memorydevice


Appears when the files in the USB flashmemory device are DRM or an unsupportedformat. This error message appears for about 3seconds, then plays the next song.Appears when the USB flash memory device isempty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC filesin the USB flash memory device. Save someMP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flashmemory device.Appears when an unsupported device isconnected. See page 250 for the specificationinformation for the USB flash memory device.If it appears when the supported device isconnected, reconnect the device.

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (EX model with navigation system)F

eatures

257



UNPLAYABLEFILE

USB NO SONG

UNSUPPORTED

10/09/02 14:13:19 31TM8610_262

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

FM/AM Radio Reception

258

10/09/02 14:13:27 31TM8610_263

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

FM/AM Radio ReceptionF

eatures

259

10/09/02 14:13:32 31TM8610_264

When a disc is not being played,store it in its case to protect it fromdust and other contamination. Toprevent warpage, keep discs out ofdirect sunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

A new disc may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on therecording surface of the disc,causing skipping or other problems.Remove these pieces by rubbing theinner and outer edges with the sideof a pencil or pen.

Handle a disc by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the disc.These, along with contaminationfrom finger prints, liquids, and felt-tip pens, can cause the disc to notplay properly, or possibly jam in thedrive.

When recording a CD-R orCD-RW, the recording must beclosed for it to be used by thesystem.

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,use only high quality discs labeledfor audio use.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe disc player.

Handle your discs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

Play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped discs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

General Information Protecting Discs

Protecting Your Discs

260


10/09/02 14:13:41 31TM8610_265

The in-dash disc player/changer hasa sophisticated and delicatemechanism. If you insert a damageddisc as indicated in this section, itmay become stuck inside anddamage the audio unit.

Examples of these discs are shownto the right:

Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs

Damaged discs Poor quality discs

1.

2. 3.

CONTINUED

Additional Information onRecommended Discs

Protecting Your DiscsF

eatures

261

Sealed

Warped BurrsChipped/Cracked

With Label/Sticker

With PlasticRing

Using PrinterLabel Kit

Bubbled/Wrinkled

10/09/02 14:13:51 31TM8610_266

Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs

CD-R or CD-RW may not play dueto the recording conditions.

Scratches and fingerprints on thediscs may cause the sound to skip.

Recommended discs are printedwith the following logo.

Audio unit may not play thefollowing formats.

4. 5.

Protecting Your Discs

262

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Arrow ShapeCan Shape

10/09/02 14:14:01 31TM8610_267

▲ ▼

＋

－

＋－

＋－

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button and hold ituntil the desired volume is reached,then release it.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,disc or a PC card (if a disc or a PCcard is loaded), or an audio unitconnected to the auxiliary input jackor the USB adapter cable.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousstation. If you press and hold the CHbutton ( ) or ( ), the system goesinto the seek mode. It finds a stationwith a strong signal.

If you are playing a disc, iPod or USBflash memory device, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack (file in MP3, WMA or AACformat) each time you press the top( ) of the CH button. Press thebottom ( ) to return to thebeginning of the current track/file.Press it twice to return to theprevious track/file.

You will see the track/file numberand the elapsed time. If the disc hastext data or is compressed in MP3 orWMA, you can also see any otherinformation (track title, file name,folder name, etc.).

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

CONTINUED

On EX models

Remote Audio ControlsF

eatures

263

CH BUTTON

MODE BUTTONVOL BUTTON

10/09/02 14:14:08 31TM8610_268

＋

－

＋

－

In MP3 or WMA mode, you can usethe seek function to select folders.Press and hold the top ( ) of theCH button until you hear a beep toskip forward to the first file of thenext folder. Press the bottom ( ) toskip backward to the previous folder.

If you are playing a PC card, pressthe top ( ) of the CH button toadvance to the next file. Press thebottom ( ) to go back to theprevious file.

Your vehicle has the auxiliary inputjack on the front panel. The systemwill accept auxiliary input fromstandard audio accessories using a1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo miniplug.

When a compatible audio unit isconnected to the jack, press the CD/AUX (on vehicles with navigationsystem) or AUX (on vehicles withoutnavigation system) button to select it.

Auxiliary Input Jack

Remote Audio Controls, Auxiliary Input Jack

264

On EX model without navigationsystem and LX model

On EX model with navigation systemand Insight model

10/09/02 14:14:15 31TM8610_269

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘ENTERCODE’’ in the frequency display thenext time you turn on the system.Use the preset buttons to enter thecode. On vehicles with navigationsystem, touch the icon to enter thecode number, then touch the Doneicon to set the code. The code is onthe radio code card included in yourowner’s manual kit. When it isentered correctly, the radio will startplaying.

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific code using the presetbuttons (icons on vehicles withnavigation system). Because thereare hundreds of numbercombinations possible from specificdigits, making the system workwithout knowing the exact code isnearly impossible.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thesequence, then enter the correctcode. You have 10 tries to enter thecorrect code. If you are unsuccessfulin 10 attempts, you must then leavethe system on for 1 hour beforetrying again.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s code andserial numbers. It is best to store thiscard in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from a dealer. Todo this, you will need the system’sserial number.

Radio Theft ProtectionF

eatures

265

10/09/02 14:14:20 31TM8610_270

On models with navigation system

On models without navigation system

The navigation system receivessignals from the global positioningsystem (GPS), and the displayedtime is updated automatically by theGPS. Refer to the navigation systemmanual for how to adjust the time.

Change the hours by pressing the H(hour) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time. Changethe minutes by pressing the M(minute) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time.

Press the CLOCK button again toenter the set time.

For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:001:52 will reset to 2:00

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, press and holdthe CLOCK button, then press the R(reset) button to set the time back tothe previous hour. If the displayedtime is after the half hour, the sameprocedure sets the time forward tothe beginning of the next hour.

To set the time, press the CLOCKbutton until you hear a beep. Thedisplayed time begins to blink.

When you set the time, the ignitionswitch must be ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position.

Setting the Clock

266

CLOCK BUTTON(A.SEL side of the A.SEL/SCAN bar)

HOUR BUTTON(PRESET 4)

HOUR BUTTON(PRESET 1)

RESET BUTTON(PRESET 6)

EX model without navigation systemand LX model

MINUTE BUTTON(PRESET 5)

CLOCK BUTTON(FM/AM button)

MINUTE BUTTON(PRESET 2)

RESET BUTTON(PRESET 3)

Insight model

10/09/02 14:14:30 31TM8610_271

The alarm will also be activated if apassenger inside the locked vehicleturns the ignition switch on.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, hatch, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the door and hatch openindicator on the instrument paneland multi-information display (seepage ) to see if the doors andhatch are fully closed. Since it is notpart of the monitor display, manuallycheck the hood.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

To see if the system is setafter you exit the vehicle, press theLOCK button on the remotetransmitter within 5 seconds. If thesystem is set, the horn will beeponce.

The security system setsautomatically 15 seconds after youlock the doors, hood, and the hatch.For the system to activate, you mustlock the doors and the hatch fromthe outside with the key, driver’slock tab, door lock master switch, orremote transmitter. The securitysystem indicator on the instrumentpanel starts blinking immediately toshow you the system is setting itself.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flash ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the audio unit.This alarm continues for 2 minutes,then the system resets. To reset anactivated system before the 2minutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s door with the key or use theremote transmitter. Once the security system is set,

opening any door, the hatch, or thehood without using the key or theremote transmitter, will cause thealarm to activate. It will also activateif the audio unit is removed from thedashboard or the wiring is cut.

12

On LX and EX models

Security SystemF

eatures

267

NOTE:SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

10/09/02 14:14:37 31TM8610_272

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel comes on.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The CRUISE CONTROLindicator on the instrument panelcomes on to show the system isnow activated.

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your vehicle speedincreases going down a hill, use thebrakes to slow down. This will cancelthe cruise control. To resume the setspeed, press the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatoron the instrument panel will comeback on.

1.

2.

3.On LX and EX models Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control

268

CANCELBUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON RES/ACCELBUTTON

SET/DECELBUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

10/09/02 14:14:45 31TM8610_273

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, the vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed, then press the SET/DECEL button.

Resting your foot on the brake pedalcauses cruise control to cancel.

Tap the brake pedal lightly withyour foot. The CRUISECONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise ControlF

eatures

269

10/09/02 14:14:54 31TM8610_274

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

Tap the brake pedal.

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system off and erases theprevious cruising speed.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake pedal, the systemwill remember the previously-setcruising speed. To return to thatspeed, accelerate to above 25 mph(40 km/h) and then press andrelease the RES/ACCEL button. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator comeson. The vehicle will accelerate to thesame cruising speed as before.

Tapping either of the paddle shiftersshifts the speed up or down, but doesnot cancel the cruise control. Formore information on driving withpaddle shifters, see page .328

EX models onlyCanceling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed

Cruise Control

270

CRUISE BUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

RES/ACCELBUTTON

SET/DECELBUTTON

10/09/02 14:15:01 31TM8610_275

－

－

Bluetooth

handsfreelink.honda.com

www.handsfreelink.ca,

HandsFreeLink (HFL)allows you to place and receivephone calls using voice commands,without handling your cell phone.

Press andrelease to give a command or answera call.

Press andrelease to end a call, go back to theprevious command, or cancel thecommand.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list ofcompatible phones, pairingprocedures, and special featurecapabilities:

In the U.S., visitor call (888) 528-7876.

In Canada, visitor call (888) 528-7876.

CONTINUED

On models with navigation systemHFL Buttons


Using HFL

HFL Talk button

HFL Back button

Features

271

HFL BACK BUTTON

NAVI VOICECONTROLBUTTONS

HFL TALKBUTTON

10/09/02 14:15:10 31TM8610_276

＃＃＃＃

Try to reduce all backgroundnoise. If the microphone picks upvoices other than yours,commands may be misinterpreted.

Many commands can be spokentogether. For example, you cansay ‘‘Call 123-456- ’’ or‘‘Dial Peter.’’

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton each time you want tomake a command. After the beep,speak in a clear, natural tone.

When HFL is in use, navigationvoice commands cannot berecognized.

To change the volume level ofHFL, use the audio system volumeknob or the steering wheel volumecontrols.

Air or wind noise from thedashboard and side vents and allwindows may interfere with themicrophone. Adjust or close themas necessary.


Voice Control Tips

272

MICROPHONE

10/09/02 14:15:16 31TM8610_277

CONTINUED

To hear general HFL information,including help on pairing a phoneor setting up the system, say‘‘Tutorial.’’

For help at any time, including alist of available commands, say‘‘Hands free help.’’

As an incoming call notification, youwill see the following display:

The Bluetooth icon will alsoappear on the display when a phoneis linked.

Some phones may send battery,signal strength, and roaming statusinformation to HFL.


Help Features Information Display

Features

273

ROAM STATUS

HFLMODE

PHONE DIALING

SIGNAL STRENGTH BATTERYLEVEL STATUS

10/09/02 14:15:24 31TM8610_278

A notification that there is anincoming call, or HFL is in use, willappear on the navigation screenwhen the audio system is on.

When there is an incoming call, orHFL is in use, ‘‘HFL’’ will appear atthe bottom of the map screen.

However, when the current street isshown, and AUDIO INFO icon isvisible, ‘‘HFL’’ will not appear whenthere is an incoming call.


274

HFL MESSAGE

10/09/02 14:15:29 31TM8610_279

＃＃＃＃

CONTINUED


How to Use HFL

Features

275

‘‘Phone Setup’’

‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial’’

‘‘Pair’’

‘‘Edit’’

‘‘Delete’’

‘‘Jim Smith’’

‘‘Set PairingCode’’

The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

‘‘List’’

‘‘Status’’

‘‘Next Phone’’

‘‘123-555- ’’

Press HFLTalk button

Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.

Edit the name of a paired phone

Delete a paired phone from the system

Hear a list of all phones paired to the system

Hear which paired phone is currently linked to the system

Search for another previously paired phone to link to

Set the pairing code to a ‘‘Fixed’’ or ‘‘Random’’ number

Pair a phone to the system (See page 278)

Enter desired phone number

Once a phonebook entry is stored, you can say a name here.

(See page 279)

(See page 279)

(See page 279)

(See page 280)

(See page 280)

(See page 281)

(See page 281)

(See page 280)

10/09/02 14:15:37 31TM8610_280


276

‘‘Redial’’

‘‘Transfer’’

‘‘Mute’’

‘‘Send’’

‘‘Phonebook’’

‘‘Store’’

‘‘Edit’’

‘‘Delete’’

‘‘ReceiveContact’’

‘‘List’’



(See page 282)Redial the last number called

Send numbers or names during a call

If your phone supports this function, use this to transfer contacts fromyour phone to HFL

Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL (See page 284)

Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call (See page 284)

Store a phonebook entry

Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry (See page 285)

Delete a phonebook entry

(See page 286)

Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries (See page 286)

(See page 284)

(See page 285)

(See page 286)

10/09/02 14:15:45 31TM8610_281

＊

＊CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLinkF

eatures

277

‘‘Change Language’’

‘‘Hands Free Help’’

‘‘SystemSet up’’

‘‘Tutorial’’

‘‘Clear’’

‘‘Auto Transfer’’

‘‘Call Notification’’

‘‘Security’’

‘‘Change Passcode’’



Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each keycycle to access the system

Change your security passcode

Set how you would like to be notified of an incoming call

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when youenter the vehicle

Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command

(See page 292)

(See page 292)

(See page 291)

Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries and securitypasscode (See page 293)

Change language from English to French

Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system (See page 273)

(See page 273)

(See page 292)

(See page 294)

Canadian models:

10/09/02 14:15:51 31TM8610_282

To use HFL, you need to pair yourBluetooth-compatible cell phone tothe system.

This command group is available forpaired cell phones.

You cannot pair your phone whilethe vehicle is moving.

Your phone must be in discoveryor search mode to pair. Refer toyour phone’s manual.

Up to six phones can be paired.

Your phone’s battery may drainfaster when it is paired to HFL.

If after three minutes your phoneis not ready to pair or a phone isnot found, the system will time outand return to idle.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton. If you are pairing a phonefor the first time, HFL will giveyou information about the pairingprocess. If it is not the first phoneyou are pairing, say ‘‘

’’ and say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts and putyour phone in discovery or searchmode. HFL will give you a 4-digitpairing code and begin searchingfor your phone.

When your phone finds aBluetooth device, select HFL fromthe options and enter the 4-digitcode from the previous step.

Follow the HFL prompts andname the newly paired phone.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Phone Setup

Phonesetup Pair

Phone pairing tips

To pair a cell phone:


278

10/09/02 14:16:01 31TM8610_283

Say ‘‘ .’’

Say ‘‘ ’’ after the prompts.

If there is more than one phonepaired to the system, HFL will askyou which phone’s name you wantto change. Follow the HFLprompts and rename the phone.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton before a command.


Say ‘‘ .’’


HFL will ask you which phone youwant to delete. Follow the HFLprompts to continue with thedeletion.


HFL will read out all the pairedphone’s names.


Say ‘‘ .’’1.

2.

3. 3.

1.

2.1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Phone setup

Edit

Phone setup

DeleteList

Phone setup

To hear the names of all pairedphones:

To rename a paired phone: To delete a paired phone:

Bluetooth HandsFreeLinkF

eatures

279

10/09/02 14:16:11 31TM8610_284


Say ‘‘ .’’


HFL will tell you which phone islinked to the system.


Say ‘‘ .’’Say ‘‘ .’’


Say ‘‘ ’’ after theprompts.

HFL disconnects the linked phoneand searches for another pairedphone.

Once another phone is found, it islinked to the system. HFL willinform you which phone is nowlinked.

If no other phones are found orpaired, HFL will inform you that theoriginal phone is linked again.


If you want HFL to create arandom code each time you pair aphone, say ‘‘ .’’ If you wantto choose your own 4-digit code tobe used each time, say ‘‘ ’’and follow the HFL prompts.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.


To hear which paired phone iscurrently linked:

To change from the currently linkedphone to another paired phone:

To change the pairing code setting:

Phone setup

Status

Phone setupPhone setup

Next phoneSet pairing code

Random

Fixed

280

10/09/02 14:16:23 31TM8610_285

CONTINUED

HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, whichmeans, the maximum range betweenyour phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10meters).

During a call, HFL allows you to talkup to 30 minutes after you removethe key from the ignition switch.However, this may weaken thevehicle’s battery.

You can make calls using a name inthe HFL phonebook or any phonenumber. You can also redial the lastnumber called.

Once connected, you will hear theperson you called through the audiospeakers.

Say ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe name stored in the HFLphonebook that you want to call.

Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the name and make thecall.

Say ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe phone number you want to dial.

Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the number and say‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’



1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.


Making a Call

Call Dial Call Dial

Call Dial

To make a call using a name in theHFL phonebook:

To make a call using a phonenumber:

Features

281

10/09/02 14:16:34 31TM8610_286

Select ‘‘.’’

Press the INFO button, then select‘‘ .’’

Select a phonebook you want tochoose a phone number from.

If the phonebook you select is PIN-protected, you will need to enter thePIN to access it. See page formore information.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’

1.

2.

3.

289


Search ImportedPhonebook

Cellular Phonebook

Redial

To redial the last number called byHFL:

To make a call from an importedphonebook:

282

10/09/02 14:16:42 31TM8610_287

Select the name. All the phonenumbers stored for that name willbe listed.

When you receive a call, an incomingcall notification (if activated) willplay and interrupt the audio systemif it is on.

Press the HFL Talk button to answerthe call, or the HFL Back button tohang up.

If your phone has Call Waiting, pressand release the HFL Talk button toput the original call on hold andanswer the incoming call.

To return to the original call, pressthe HFL Talk button again. If youdon’t want to answer the incomingcall, disregard it and continue withyour original call. If you want to hangup the original call and answer thenew call, press the HFL Back button.

To search for a specific name in thephonebook, enter the keyword foreither the first or last name.

To display all names in thephonebook, select the ‘‘ ’’ option.

If you choose ‘‘,’’ the phone

number will be stored in HFL, sothat you can call it using HFL’s nametag by voice.

Select the phone number, andHFL begins dialing.

4.

5.


Receiving a Call

ListStore in

HandsFreeLink

Call Waiting

Features

283

List ICON

10/09/02 14:16:53 31TM8610_288

＃

You can transfer a call from HFL toyour phone, or from your phone toHFL.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’

You can mute your voice to theperson you are talking to during acall.

HFL allows you to send numbers ornames during a call. This is usefulwhen you call a menu-driven phonesystem.To mute your voice during a call,

press and release the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’

To unmute your voice, press andrelease the HFL Talk button and say‘‘ ’’ again.


To send a pound ( ), say‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’

Follow the HFL prompts to sendthe tones and continue the call.

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe name or number you want tosend.

Say ‘‘ .’’1.

2.

3.


Transferring a Call

Transfer

Muting a Call Send Numbers or Names Duringa Call

Mute

MuteSend

To send a name or number during acall:

284

NOTE:

10/09/02 14:17:04 31TM8610_289

You can store up to 50 names withtheir associated numbers in HFL.The numbers you store can be notonly phone numbers but other types,such as account numbers orpasswords, which can be sent duringa menu-driven call.


Say ‘‘ .’’


Say a name you want to list as yourphonebook entry.

Say the number you want to storefor the name entry.

Follow the HFL prompts and say‘‘ ’’ to store the entry.

Avoid using duplicate nameentries.

Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a nameentry.

It is easier for HFL to recognize amultisyllabic or longer name. Forexample, use ‘‘Peter’’ instead of‘‘Pete,’’ or ‘‘John Smith’’ instead of‘‘John.’’


Say ‘‘ .’’


Follow the HFL prompts and saythe name entry you want to edit.

When asked, say the new numberfor that name.

Follow the HFL prompts tocomplete the edit.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED


To store a phonebook entry:

To edit the number stored in a name:

Phonebook

Store

Enter

NOTE:

Phonebook

Edit

Phonebook

Features

285

10/09/02 14:17:17 31TM8610_290



Say ‘‘ .’’


Say the name you want to deleteand follow the HFL prompts tocomplete the deletion.

Say ‘‘ .’’


HFL begins reading the names inthe order they were stored.

If you hear a name you want to call,immediately press the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’


Follow the HFL prompts, select anumber from your cell phone, andsend it to HFL.


Say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts andname the number, or say‘‘ ’’ if it is not the numberyou want to store.

Follow the HFL prompts if youwant to store another number.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

5.


Phonebook

Delete

Phonebook

List

Call

Receive contact

Phonebook

Discard

To delete a name: To list all names in the phonebook: To store a specific phone numberfrom your cell phone directly to theHFL phonebook (available on somephones):

286

10/09/02 14:17:31 31TM8610_291

(available on some phones)

handsfreelink.honda.com

www.handsfreelink.ca,

If you selectfrom the Information screen menu,you will see four HFL options.

In the U.S., visitor call (888) 528-7876.

The entire phonebook data of thecell phone that is linked to HFL canbe imported to the navigation system.

Select ‘‘,’’ and HFL will begin

importing the phonebook. Select‘‘ ’’ after the import is completed.

Once a phonebook has beenimported, you can search the phonenumbers by the person’s name.

Select ‘‘,’’ and a list of imported

phonebooks will be displayed.

Select a phonebook from the list.

For a list of cell phones that arecompatible with this feature:

In Canada, visitor call (888) 528-7876.

CONTINUED


Cellular Phonebook

Cellular Phonebook

Import CellularPhonebook

OK

Search ImportedPhonebook

Import Cellular Phonebook: Search Imported Phonebook:

Features

287

IMPORTED PHONEBOOK

IMPORTED DATE

PIN ICON

10/09/02 14:17:42 31TM8610_292

Select a person from the list. Up tothree category icons are displayed inthe left side of the list:

Select the person’s number you wantto call, and press the HFL Talkbutton.

These indicate how many numbersare stored for the name. If a namehas more than three category icons,‘‘…’’ is displayed.

If the phonebook is PIN-protected,you will need to enter the 4-digit PIN.

To search for a specific name in thephonebook, enter the keyword foreither the first or last name.

To display all names in thephonebook, select the ‘‘ ’’ option.


List

288

Preference

Home

Mobile

Work

Pager

Fax

Car

Voice

Other

List ICON

10/09/02 14:17:54 31TM8610_293

Select ‘‘,’’ and a list of imported

phonebooks will be displayed.

After making a selection, thefollowing screen will appear.

Select ‘‘ ,’’ then ‘‘ ’’ to completethe deletion.

You can add, change, or remove aPIN number from any phonebook.

You can delete any importedphonebook.

Select a phonebook you want todelete. If the phonebook is PIN-protected, you will need to enter the4-digit PIN number.

If you have selected a phonebookwithout a PIN, you will see the abovedisplay.

Enter the new 4-digit PIN. You willhave to re-enter the PIN forconfirmation.

CONTINUED


Delete ImportedPhonebook

Yes OK

PIN NumberDelete Imported Phonebook:

To add a PIN:

Features

289

10/09/02 14:18:05 31TM8610_294

Select ‘‘ ,’’ then select‘‘ ’’ after you enterthe current PIN.

Enter the new 4-digit PIN number.You will be asked to re-enter the PINfor verification.

The display will change as shownabove.

Select the phonebook you want. Thedisplay will change as shown above.

Enter the current PIN for thisphonebook.


To remove a PIN:To change the PIN to a new number:PIN number

Do not use PIN

290

10/09/02 14:18:13 31TM8610_295

This command group allows you tochange or customize HFL basicsettings.


Say ‘‘ .’’Say ‘‘ ’’ after the prompts.Follow the HFL prompts and saythe 4-digit passcode you want toset.Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the number.

Once a passcode is set, youwill need to enter it to use HFL eachtime you start the vehicle. If youforget the code, your dealer will haveto reset it for you, or you will have toclear the entire system (see page

).1.2.3.

4.

293

CONTINUED

System Setup

System setupSecurity


To set a 4-digit passcode to lock theHFL system for security purposes:

Features

291

NOTE:

10/09/02 14:18:21 31TM8610_296

＊

＊

If you get into the vehicle while youare on the phone, the call can beautomatically transferred to HFLwith the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.


Say ‘‘ .’’Say ‘‘ ’’ after theprompts.HFL will let you know if autotransfer is on or off, depending onthe previous setting. Follow theHFL prompts to change thesetting.


Say ‘‘ .’’Say ‘‘ ’’ after theprompts.Follow the HFL prompts and saythe new 4-digit passcode.Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the number.


Say ‘‘ .’’Say ‘‘ ’’ after theprompts.Follow the HFL prompts and say‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’ Youcan also say ‘‘ ’’ for no audibleincoming call notification.

The default setting is a ring tone.

2.

3.

4.

1.2.

3.1.2.

3.

1.

:

System setupAuto transfer

System setupChange passcode

System setupCall notif ication

Ring tone PromptOff


To change your security passcode: To select either a ring tone or aprompt as the incoming callnotif ication :

To activate or deactivate the autotransfer function:

292

10/09/02 14:18:34 31TM8610_297

This operation clears the passcodes,paired phones, all names in the HFLphonebook, and all importedphonebook data.


Say ‘‘ .’’


Follow the HFL prompts tocontinue to complete the clearingprocedure.

You can also clear the system whenyou have forgotten the passcode andcannot access HFL. When HFL asksyou for the passcode, say ‘‘

.’’ Paired phones, all names inthe HFL phonebook and all importedphonebook data will be lost.


Follow the HFL prompts.

Say the language you want tochange to in that language.

1.

2.

3.

2.

1.

Canadian models only

System setup

Clear

Systemclear

Quick Language Selection


To clear the system:

To quickly change the language:

Features

293

10/09/02 14:18:43 31TM8610_298

The name and logos areregistered trademarks owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use ofsuch marks by Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. is under license. Othertrademarks and trade names arethose of their respective owners.


Say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts tochange the language to English orFrench.

If you have not named your pairedphone in the language you justselected, HFL will ask you to name itin the current language.

When French is your currentlyselected language, you can give voicecommands in French.

1.

2.

BluetoothAs required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.



Canadian models onlyBluetooth

To change the system languagebetween English and French:

Wireless TechnologyChange Language

Change language


294

10/09/02 14:18:52 31TM8610_299

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 296.................Fuel Recommendation . 296

.........Service Station Procedures . 297....................................Refueling . 297

.....Tighten Fuel Cap Message . 299Opening and Closing the

.......................................Hood . 300...................................Oil Check . 301

.............Engine Coolant Check . 302...............................Fuel Economy . 303

...Accessories and Modifications . 306.............................Carrying Cargo . 308

Before DrivingB

eforeD

riving

295

10/09/02 14:18:56 31TM8610_300

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 87 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

We recommend using qualitygasolines containing detergentadditives that help prevent fuelsystem and engine deposits.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contact

your authorized dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10% ethanol byvolume and up to 15% MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation for your vehicle, orinformation on gasoline that does notcontain MMT, visit Owner Link at

. In Canada, visitfor additional

information on gasoline.

owners.honda.comwww.honda.ca

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

296

10/09/02 14:19:05 31TM8610_301

CONTINUED

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

Outside of the vehicle, push on theright side edge of the fuel fill doorin the middle until you hear a click.The fuel fill door will pop upslightly. Pull it outward to open it.

1.

2.

Service Station Procedures

Refueling

Before

Driving

297

Push

FUEL FILL DOOR Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

10/09/02 14:19:12 31TM8610_302

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Thisleaves some room in the fuel tankfor the fuel to expand withtemperature changes.

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking offeven though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapor from going into theatmosphere. Try filling at anotherpump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,you will see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUELCAP’’ message on the multi-information display. If the systemstill detects an evaporative systemleak after retightening the cap, themalfunction indicator lamp maycome on (see page ).

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank equalizes.The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel filler with a tether. Place thecap in the holder on the fuel filldoor.

417

3.

4. 5.


298

TETHER

HOLDER FUEL FILL CAP

10/09/02 14:19:17 31TM8610_303

Your vehicle’s on board diagnosticsystem will detect a loose or missingfuel fill cap as an evaporative systemleak. The first time a leak is detecteda ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ messageappears on the multi-informationdisplay.

Turn the engine off, and confirm thefuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosenit, then retighten it until it clicks atleast once. The message should gooff after several days of normaldriving once you tighten or replacethe fuel fill cap. To scroll to anothermessage, press the INFO button.

The ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’message will appear each time yourestart the engine until the systemturns the message off.

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

6.

CONTINUED

Tighten Fuel Cap Message

Service Station ProceduresB

eforeD

riving

299

10/09/02 14:19:23 31TM8610_304

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

If the system still detects a leak inthe vehicle’s evaporative emissionssystem, the malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fillcap was not already tightened, turnthe engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL shouldgo off after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If the MIL does not go off,have your vehicle inspected by adealer. For more information, seepage .

If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood near the center.Slide your hand to the left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle to the left torelease the hood. Lift up the hood.

1. 2.417

Opening and Closing the Hood


300

LATCHHOOD RELEASE HANDLE

Pull

10/09/02 14:19:29 31TM8610_305

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto its hole.

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop. Make sure itis securely latched.

Holding the grip, pull the supportrod out of its clip. Insert the endinto the designated hole in thehood.

2.

3.

1.

3.

CONTINUED

Oil Check

Service Station ProceduresB

eforeD

riving

301

SUPPORT ROD CLIP

GRIP DIPSTICK

10/09/02 14:19:38 31TM8610_306

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

4.

367

359

362

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Adding Engine Oil


302

LOWER MARK

UPPER MARK

RESERVE TANK

MIN

MAX

10/09/02 14:19:45 31TM8610_307

－

－

－

－

Fuel economy is not a fixed number.It varies based on driving conditions,driving habits, and vehicle condition.Therefore, it is not possible for oneset of estimates to predict fueleconomy precisely for all drivers inall environments.

The EPA fuel economy estimatesshown in the example to the rightare a useful tool for comparisonwhen buying a vehicle. EPAestimates include:

Represents a combination of city andhighway driving. The scalerepresents the range of combinedfuel economy for other vehicles inthe class.

Represents amixture of rural and interstatedriving, in a warmed-up vehicle,typical of longer trips in free-flowingtraffic. A range of miles per gallon

achieved is also provided.

Represents urbandriving in light traffic. A range ofmiles per gallon achieved is alsoprovided.

Provides an estimated annual fuelcost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000km) per year multiplied by the cost

per gallon (based on EPA fuel costdata) divided by the combined fueleconomy.

For more information on fueleconomy ratings and factors thataffect fuel economy, visit

(Canada: Visit)

www.fueleconomy.gov www.vehicles.gc.ca

Actual Mileage and EPA FuelEconomy Estimates Comparison.

Combined Fuel Economy

Highway MPG

City MPG

Estimated Annual Fuel Cost

Fuel EconomyB

eforeD

riving

303

Combined FuelEconomy

(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

Estimated AnnualFuel Cost

City MPG Highway MPG

10/09/02 14:19:54 31TM8610_308

－

－－

－

－－

Aggressive driving (hardacceleration and braking)Excessive idling, accelerating andbraking in stop-and-go trafficCold engine operation (enginesare more efficient when warmedup)Driving with a heavy load or theair conditioner runningImproperly inflated tires

The following factors can lower yourvehicle’s fuel economy:

A properly maintained vehiclemaximizes fuel economy. Poormaintenance can significantly reducefuel economy. Always maintain yourvehicle according to the maintenancemessages displayed on the multi-information display (see

on page ).For example:

Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking increase fuelconsumption.

Aerodynamic drag has a big effecton fuel economy at speeds above45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce yourspeed and you reduce the drag.Trailers, car top carriers, roofracks and bike racks are also bigcontributors to increased drag.

An underinflated tire increases‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reducesfuel economy.

It puts a heavierload on the engine, increasing fuelconsumption.

Inparticular, a build-up of snow ormud on your vehicle’s undersideadds weight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fueleconomy.

Idlingresults in 0 miles per gallon (0 kmsper liter).

Use the ECON ON mode as muchas possible.

359

Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscositymotor oil, displaying the APICertif ication Seal (see page

).

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Drive moderately

Observe the speed limitMaintain proper tire inflation

Avoid carrying excess weight inyour vehicle

Keep your vehicle clean Avoid excessive idling

362

Vehicle Maintenance

Drive Efficiently

Fuel Economy

304

10/09/02 14:20:07 31TM8610_309

－

－

Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.Reset trip counter to zero.Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.Follow one of the simple calculations above.

The A/Cputs an extra load on the enginewhich makes it use more fuel. Usethe fresh-air ventilation whenpossible.

Direct calculation is therecommended source of informationabout your actual fuel economy.Using frequency of fill-ups or takingfuel gauge readings are NOTaccurate measures of fuel economy.Fuel economy may improve over thefirst several thousand miles(kilometers).

Combine several short trips intoone. A warmed-up engine is morefuel efficient than a cold one.

1)2)3)4)

Checking Your Fuel Economy

Measuring Techniques

Minimize the use of the airconditioning system

Calculating Fuel Economy

Plan and combine trips

Fuel EconomyB

eforeD

riving

305

Milesdriven

Gallonsof fuel

Miles perGallon

100 KilometersL per

100 kmLiter

10/09/02 14:20:16 31TM8610_310

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Before installing any accessory:Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags, anti-lock brakes, andtire pressure monitoring system (ifequipped).

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. Accessories installed inthese areas may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withthe proper operation of yourvehicle.

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

419

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

306

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

10/09/02 14:20:26 31TM8610_311

＊

＊

Some examples are:

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withnon-Honda components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents and will not becompatible with the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) .

Raising your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit canaffect the handling, stability, andreliability.

Lowering your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

: U.S. models

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and ModificationsB

eforeD

riving

307

10/09/02 14:20:33 31TM8610_312

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove boxDoor pockets

Cargo area

Center trayFloor storage compartmentUnder floor storages

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Console compartmentCoin pocket

Seat-back pockets

: If equipped

Carrying Cargo

308

CENTER TRAY

CARGO AREA

DOOR POCKETS

GLOVE BOX

FLOOR STORAGECOMPARTMENT

UNDER FLOORSTORAGES

COIN POCKET

SEAT-BACKPOCKETS

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

: If equippedEX with navigation system model is shown.

10/09/02 14:20:43 31TM8610_313

－ ×

－

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amountequals 1,400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb. passengers in yourvehicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs.(1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

Locate the statement ‘‘Thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’splacard.

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

The maximum load for your vehicleis 850 lbs (385 kg).

See Tire And Loading Informationlabel attached to the driver’sdoorjamb.

Label Example

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, andaccessories, and the tongue load ifyou are towing a trailer.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(6)

(5)

(4)

CONTINUED

Load Limits

Carrying CargoB

eforeD

riving

309

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

10/09/02 14:20:55 31TM8610_314

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all occupants, accessories,cargo, and trailer tongue load mustnot exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). Bothare on a label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

Carrying Cargo

310

Max Load 850 lbs(385 kg)



Cargo Weight250 lbs(113 kg)


Passenger Weight150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)




10/09/02 14:21:01 31TM8610_315

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, the operation of the seats,or the operation of the sensorsunder the seats.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the hatch, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

Try to secure the items with ropeor cord so they will not shift whileyou are driving.

Do not place items on the cargoarea cover (if equipped), or stackobjects higher than the top of theback seat. They could block yourview and be thrown about thevehicle during a crash or suddenstop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thehatch, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

If you fold the rear seats down, tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop. Keep all cargo belowthe bottom of the windows. If it ishigher, it could interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

Refer to page for folding rearseats.Do not spill any liquids on or

around the IMA battery. Spilledliquids may damage the IMAbattery. If you accidentally spillliquids on or around the battery,ensure that the spill is completelywiped up at the earliest possibletime.

56

142

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Carrying CargoB

eforeD

riving

311

10/09/02 14:21:10 31TM8610_316

Do not spill any liquids over the airintake or insert any foreign objectsin it. This may damage the IMAbattery and the power control unit.

The air intake for the IMA batteryand electronics is located on the rearleft pillar. Do not block this air intake.Doing so may cause the IMA batteryand the power control unit tooverheat, causing the IMA to shutdown. It will start working againafter it cools.

Air Intake

Carrying Cargo

312

AIR INTAKE

10/09/02 14:21:15 31TM8610_317

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate theautomatic transmissions (CVT). Italso includes important informationon parking your vehicle, the brakingsystem, the vehicle stability assist(VSA ) system, and the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS).

........................Preparing to Drive . 314.......................Starting the Engine . 315........................Eco Assist System . 316

.Automatic Transmission (CVT) . 323Driving with the Paddle

.......................................Shifters . 328................................Auto Idle Stop . 333

...........................................Parking . 336.............................Braking System . 337

...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 339Tire Pressure Monitoring System

......................................(TPMS) . 341Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),

aka Electronic Stability........Control (ESC), System . 345

...........................Towing a Trailer . 347

DrivingD

riving

313

10/09/02 14:21:18 31TM8610_318

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure (see page ).

Check that the hood and hatch arefully closed.

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel, and themessages on the multi-informationdisplay (see pages , and

).

1.

2.

3.

8.

7.

6.

9.4.

5.

61 7275

17

138

144

125

10.

389

Preparing to Drive

314

10/09/02 14:21:27 31TM8610_319

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

In cold weather, the conventionalstarter is used instead of the IMAsystem starter. This is normal.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in the START (III)position for more than 15 secondsat a time. If the engine does notstart right away, pause for at least10 seconds before trying again.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Starting the Engine

Starting in Cold Weather

Driving

315

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperlycoded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .127

10/09/02 14:21:35 31TM8610_320

The multi-information display (seepage ).

Your vehicle’s fuel economy mayimprove more with the ECON modeon (see page ).

The driver feedback information isshown in two locations:

The ambient meter, locatedbehind the speedometer (see page

).

The system monitors your drivingstyle, and can display how it impactsyour vehicle’s fuel economy. You canthen make adjustments to yourdriving style to maximize fueleconomy. (For additionalinformation on fuel economy, seepage .)

Eco Assist System is a driverfeedback system designed to helpyou develop and maintain a fuelefficient driving style.

72

75

124

303

Eco Assist System

316

ECO-drive Result

ECON BUTTON

ECO-guide feedback

ECON MODE INDICATORAmbient Meter

10/09/02 14:21:42 31TM8610_321

The Eco Drive Bar on the Eco guidefeedback display appears on themulti-information display while youdrive.

During acceleration, the barextends to the right of the centerline.

If the bar extends into theInefficient Driving Zones, yourcurrent driving style is notconducive to good fuel economy.

If the bar stays within the EfficientDriving Zones, your currentdriving style is conducive to goodfuel economy.

During deceleration, the barextends to the left of the centerline.

It is recommended to drive in the Dposition for better fuel efficiency.

CONTINUED

Eco Drive BarDriving StyleSlow, steadyacceleration -maximizes fueleconomySlow deceleration -maximizes fueleconomyModerateacceleration

Moderatedeceleration

Aggressive/Inconsistentacceleration - lowersfuel economyAggressivedeceleration - lowersfuel economy

Eco Guide Feedback Eco Drive Bar Examples

Eco Assist SystemD

riving

317

ECODRIVEBAR

AccelerationMonitor

Inefficient Driving Zone

Center Position

DecelerationMonitor

Inefficient Braking Zone

Efficient Zones

ECO ELEMENTS

10/09/02 14:21:55 31TM8610_322

The Ambient Meter (the lightbehind the speedometer) changescolor to show the effects of yourdriving style. This feature can beturned off (see page ).

Fuel EconomyMeter Background Color

103

Ambient Meter

Eco Assist System

318

AMBIENT METER


(Background Color)Green

Blue Green

Blue

High

Low

10/09/02 14:22:04 31TM8610_323

－

CONTINUED

A point system is used so you canmonitor your driving style and theimpact on fuel economy. Points are:

Accumulated when your drivingstyle is fuel efficientDeducted when your style is notfuel efficient

Your currenttrip is represented on the Eco Guidescreen, starting without any leaveson the plants. Leaves thenaccumulate during the current trip,as long as you maintain an economicdriving style.

Eco Assist scoring is displayed onthe multi-information display in thefollowing ways:

Eco Assist Scoring

Real Time Score

Eco Assist SystemD

riving

319

FIRST STAGE THIRD STAGE

PLANT ICON

SECOND STAGE

Real Time Score

With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position

10/09/02 14:22:13 31TM8610_324

－

－

The scorefrom your just completed trip isrepresented on the Eco Score screenby the ‘‘plant’’ icons.

Cumulative, orlifetime trips, which build up overtime, represented by a bar graph atthe bottom of the Eco Score display.

Each time you turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position, theEco Score displays for a few secondsto show your current stage andlifetime points.

Drive Cycle Score

Lifetime Points

Eco Assist System

320

STAGE-UPRECOGNITIONICON

When turning off the ignition switch

TROPHY

STAGE-DOWN RECOGNITION ICON

Drive Cycle Score/Lifetime Points

DRIVE CYCLESCORE

LIFETIMEPOINTS

10/09/02 14:22:19 31TM8610_325

There are three Eco stages, with fiveplants per stage. As you accumulatea specified number of leaves, youadvance from one stage to the next.The plant grows leaves from left toright, or loses them from right to left.A trophy icon appears once you havereached the maximum third stagescore.

Idle durationECON button usageVehicle speedBraking and accelerating

The scoring system for points isbased on:

Stages/Displays and Icons Definition

CONTINUED

A total of two leaves can be put on each plant icon.

A total of four leaves can be added to each plant icon.

A circular shaped icon, which represents a blossom, can beadded on top of each plant icon with four leaves.

An icon appears once you have reached the maximum score foreach stage and are moving up to the next stage. These iconsappear briefly when the ignition switch is turned off.Once the 3rd stage maximum score is reached, the systemcontinues to monitor your driving. If you maintain a fuelefficient driving style, your score remains at the highest stage.If you drive less efficiently, points will be deducted and youmay drop (stage down) to the previous stage.

Real time scores must accumulate over time to result in a stage change. In order to build lifetimepoints and advance to the next stage, you need to keep your efficient driving style every time youmake a trip. It can take several months to move from one stage to the next. Individual results willvary.

Eco Assist SystemD

riving

321

First Stage

Second Stage

Third Stage

Maximum Score Icons

SecondStage

FirstStage

ThirdStage

10/09/02 14:22:30 31TM8610_326

＊

＊

The following procedure clears allleaves and your lifetime points. Thisprocedure must be followed exactly.

As you progress to a higher level, thesystem monitors your driving stylemore strictly. As a result, you mustfurther refine your driving style tocontinue to move up to the next level.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Confirm that the ECONmode is OFF. If it is OFF, proceed tostep 1. Do run the engine.

The following are some of theconditions that may affect yourscore:

Extremely high or low ambienttemperatureInconsistent acceleration use, suchas pumping the pedal repeatedlywithin a short period of timeFrequent use of the climatecontrol systemShort distance trips

If the ECON mode is on, press andrelease the ECON button to turn itoff. You also need to turn the ignitionswitch off.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position again. Do run theengine.

Press and release the brake pedalat least two times. The ambientmeter color changes from blue togreen .

Complete the following steps within30 seconds:

The ambient meter colorchanges only if the multi-information display’s metercolor change setting is on. (Seepage .)

Press and release the ECONbutton two times (ECON modecomes on, then goes off). Theambient meter color goes off, andthe accumulated data is cleared.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.

:

1.

2.

3.

103

Reset the System

not

not

Eco Assist System

322

10/09/02 14:22:41 31TM8610_327

Honda’s Continuously VariableTransmission’s unique designprovides a smooth, constant flow ofpower. It is electronically controlledfor more precise operation andbetter fuel economy.

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem with theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of apossible problem with thetransmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECKTRANSMISSION’’ message on themulti-information display.

Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT)

Shift Lever Position Indicators

Automatic Transmission (CVT)D

riving

323

EX modelsInsight and LX models

10/09/02 14:22:49 31TM8610_328

To shift from Park to any position,press the brake pedal, the releasebutton on the front of the shift lever,then pull the lever. You cannot shiftout of Park when the ignition switchis in the LOCK (0) or theACCESSORY (I) position.

To shift from:

P to R

R to PN to RD to SS to DD to NN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpress the release button.

Press the release button.

Move the lever.

To shift from:P to R

R to PN to RD to SS to LL to SS to DD to NN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpress the release button.

Press the release button.

Move the lever.

EX modelsInsight and LX modelsShifting

Automatic Transmission (CVT)

324

SHIFT LEVERRELEASE BUTTON

10/09/02 14:22:55 31TM8610_329

－－

－

－

－

CONTINUED

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically adjusts tokeep the engine at the best speed fordriving conditions. To help theengine warm up faster, thetransmission will select ratios thatallow the engine to run at higherspeeds when it is cold.

Press the brakepedal and the release button on thefront of the shift lever to shift fromPark to reverse. To shift fromreverse to neutral, come to acomplete stop, and then shift. Pressthe release button before shiftinginto reverse from neutral.

Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Always shift to thePark position if you need to leave thevehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from Neutral toanother position.

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the front of the shift leverto move it.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

You must also press the releasebutton to shift into Park. To avoidtransmission damage, come to acomplete stop before shifting intoPark. The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

To shift into the Sposition, press the release button onthe front of the shift lever, and movethe lever to S. Selecting Secondshifts the transmission into a lowerrange of ratios for betteracceleration and increased enginebraking. Use Second when you aregoing down a steep hill.

327

Insight and LX models


Drive (D)Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

Park (P)

Shift Lock ReleaseSecond (S) D

riving

325

10/09/02 14:23:03 31TM8610_330

－－ When the vehicle reaches themaximum speed in any shift position,you may feel the engine cut in andout. This is caused by a limiter (112mph, 180 km/h) in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce thespeed to below the maximum.

To shift into the Sposition, press the release button onthe front of the shift lever, and movethe lever to S. The S position issimilar to D, except the range ofratios are different for betteracceleration and increased enginebraking.

With the shift lever in D or S, youcan also use the paddle shifters toshift the transmission up or down.With the paddle shifters, you canoperate the transmission much like amanual transmission without aclutch pedal. For more informationon driving with the paddle shifters,see page .

To shift to Low, pressthe release button on the front of theshift lever. Use Low to make betteruse of engine power when climbing,and for maximum engine brakingwhen going down steep hills.

For faster acceleration when in D, S,or L, the transmission willautomatically ‘‘kick down’’ to a lowerrange of ratios by pushing theaccelerator pedal to the floor.

328

EX modelsInsight and LX models


Second (S)Low (L)Speed Limiter

326

10/09/02 14:23:08 31TM8610_331

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the shift leverout of Park to neutral.

Insert the key in the shift lockrelease slot.

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

Put a cloth on the notch of theshift lock release slot cover toprevent scratches. Using a smallflat-tip screwdriver or a metalfingernail file, carefully pry on thenotch of the cover to remove it.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Set the parking brake.

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then reinstall thecover. Make sure the notch on thecover is on the left side. Insert thekey into the ignition switch, pressthe brake pedal, and restart theengine.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

6.

Shift Lock Release

Automatic Transmission (CVT)D

riving

327

COVER SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

RELEASE BUTTON

10/09/02 14:23:19 31TM8610_332

＋－

＋－

To shift up or down, use the(right) or (left) paddle shifter oneither side of the steering wheel.

Pull the (right) paddle shifter toupshift. Pull (left) to downshift.

When you pull either paddle shifter,the shift indicator shows you theselected speed number.

Downshifting gives you more powerwhen climbing, and provides enginebraking when going down a steep hill.

When you are driving in the Dposition, pulling either paddle shifterswitches from the ordinaryautomatic transmission (CVT) to theD-paddle shift mode. You can shiftthe transmission up or down throughseven-stages manually with thepaddle shifters.

When the transmission returns toordinary automatic transmission(CVT), the displayed shift indicatordisappears.

On EX models

Driving with the Paddle Shifters

Using the Paddle Shifters in theD position (D-Paddle Shift Mode)

328

SHIFT INDICATOR

10/09/02 14:23:26 31TM8610_333

－＋

CONTINUED

The transmission control systemmonitors the accelerator pedal useand your driving conditions. Whenyou press the accelerator pedal as inthe normal driving, the systemjudges that you are driving at aconstant cruising speed withoutusing the paddle shifters. Underthese conditions, D-paddle shiftmode is canceled, and thetransmission automatically returns toordinary automatic transmission(CVT).

Downshifting with the (left)paddle shifter allows you to increasethe engine braking when going downsteep or long hills, and providesmore power when climbing uphills.You can upshift the transmissionmanually to reduce the rpm.

To cancel the D-paddle shift modemanually, pull and hold the sidepaddle shifter until the shift indicatorgoes out.

The transmission remains in theselected speed if you do notaccelerate.

Driving with the Paddle ShiftersD

riving

329

10/09/02 14:23:31 31TM8610_334

Each time you pull either paddleshifter, the transmission shifts onespeed up or down. If you want toshift up or down more than twospeeds, pull the paddle shifter twice,pause, and then pull it again.

The automatic transmission (CVT)will not allow you to shift if:

The transmission downshifts to firstspeed and returns to ordinaryautomatic transmission (CVT) whenthe vehicle comes to a complete stopand the vehicle speed is about 6 mph(10 km/h).

If there is a problem in thetransmission while you are drivingwith the paddle shifters, the Dindicator flashes, the D-paddle shiftmode is canceled, and thetransmission returns to ordinaryautomatic transmission (CVT).

You pull one of the two paddleshifters with another paddleshifter being pressed.

You press both paddle shifters atthe same time.

You upshift before the enginespeed reaches the lowestthreshold of the higher speed.

If you try to do this, the shiftindicator will flash the number ofthe lower speed several times,then return to a higher speed.

You downshift before the enginespeed reaches the highestthreshold of the lower speed.


330

10/09/02 14:23:38 31TM8610_335

＋－

－

With the shift lever in the S position,you can select the 7-Speed Manualshift mode to shift speeds; much likea manual transmission using thepaddle shifters, but without a clutchpedal.

When you move the shift lever fromthe ‘‘D’’ to the ‘‘S’’ position and pulleither paddle shifter, the shiftindicator displays ‘‘M’’ along with theselected speed number.

To upshift, pull the (right) paddleshifter. To downshift, pull the(left) paddle shifter.

If you keep depressing theaccelerator pedal without pressingthe paddle shifter, the speed will beautomatically shifted up just beforethe tachometer’s red zone.

The transmission also shiftsautomatically as the vehicle comes toa complete stop. It downshifts to firstspeed when the vehicle speedreaches 6 mph (10 km/h) or less.

Downshifting with the (left)paddle shifter allows you to increasethe engine braking when going downsteep or long hills, and providesmore power when climbing uphills.You can upshift the transmissionmanually to reduce the rpm.

To enter the 7-speed manual shiftmode, press the release button onthe front of the shift lever, move thelever to the S position, then pulleither paddle shifter. To cancel the7-speed manual shift mode andreturn to the ordinary automatictransmission (CVT), move the shiftlever from the S position. Whenmoving the shift lever, be careful notto operate incorrectly. While you aredriving in the 7-speed manual shiftmode, the transmission will notautomatically return to the ordinaryautomatic transmission (CVT). CONTINUED

On EX models


Using the Paddle Shifters in the Sposition (7-Speed Manual ShiftMode)

Driving

331

SHIFT INDICATOR

‘‘M’’ INDICATOR

10/09/02 14:23:47 31TM8610_336

－

→

→

→

→

→

→

The automatic transmission (CVT)will not allow you to shift if:

You downshift before the enginespeed reaches the highestthreshold of the lower speed.

If you try to do this, the shiftindicator will flash the number ofthe lower speed several times,then return to a higher speed.

You upshift before the enginespeed reaches the lowestthreshold of the higher speed.

You press both paddle shifters atthe same time.

You pull one of the two paddleshifters with another paddleshifter being pressed.

Drive in the highest speed numberthat lets the engine run andaccelerate smoothly. This will giveyou effective emissions control. Thefollowing shift points arerecommended:

To shift to Low,press and hold both paddle shifterssimultaneously until you see L in theshift indicator. Use Low to get morepower when climbing, and formaximum engine braking whengoing down steep hills.

Shift up

1 2

2 3

3 4

4 5

5 6

6 7

Normal acceleration

15 mph (24 km/h)

25 mph (40 km/h)

40 mph (64 km/h)

45 mph (72 km/h)

50 mph (81 km/h)

55 mph (89 km/h)


Recommended Shift Points L (Low) mode

332

10/09/02 14:23:55 31TM8610_337

To help maximize fuel economy,your vehicle has an Auto Idle Stopfunction. Depending onenvironmental conditions and vehicleoperation, the engine will shut offwhen you come to a stop.

The transmission fluidtemperature is low.

When the vehicle is stopped on anincline.

The windshield defroster is on.

The fan speed is selected to high(more than four steps on thehorizontal fan speed indicators).

The IMA battery charge is low.

While the auto idle stop function isactivated, the auto idle stop indicatorin the instrument panel blinks (seepage ).

When the ECON mode is on, theengine is more likely to stop thanwhen it is off (see page ).

The engine will not stopautomatically under the followingconditions:

The engine coolant temperature islow.

The engine automatically stops whenthe vehicle comes to a stop with theshift lever in the D position and thebrake pedal pressed.The engine may also stop whenvehicle speed drops below 7 mph (11km/h) with the brake pedal pressed. Vehicle speed does not go above 9

mph (15 km/h) after starting theengine.

The vehicle is stopped with theshift position in P, R, S, or L.

124

335

CONTINUED

Auto Idle StopD

riving

333

10/09/02 14:24:06 31TM8610_338

The engine coolant temperaturebecomes low.

The pressure on the brake pedal isrepeatedly applied and releasedslightly during a stop.

The ECON button is off, and thedifference between the ambienttemperature and the temperaturesetting of the climate controlsystem becomes significant.

The climate control system startsto dehumidify the interior

The engine automatically restartswhen:

The brake pedal is released.

Under the following conditions, theengine restarts even if the brakepedal is pressed:

The shift position is changed to Ror L.

The accelerator pedal is pressed

The pressure to the brake pedal isreduced and the vehicle startsmoving while stopped on an incline.

The IMA battery charge becomeslow.

The engine may not stopautomatically under the followingconditions:

The windshield defroster button ispressed.

The ECON button is off, and thereis a significant difference betweenthe ambient temperature and thetemperature setting of the climatecontrol system.

The climate control system isdehumidifying the air.

The vehicle is stopped by brakingsuddenly.

When the ECON button is on, theengine is more likely to stop. Seepage for the ECON button.124

Auto Idle Stop

334

10/09/02 14:24:16 31TM8610_339

If the auto idle stop function turnsoff the engine for a long time, thecharge of the IMA and 12 voltbatteries becomes low, and theengine may not restart automatically.Always turn the ignition switch tothe LOCK (0) position, set theparking brake, and remove the key ifyou are getting out of the vehicle.

The time that auto idle stop isactivated may be reduced if youoperate the windshield wipers withthe climate control system on.

This indicator blinks when the autoidle stop system is in operation. Ifthe driver’s door is opened while theindicator is blinking, the buzzersounds to notify that the auto idlestop system is active.

Auto Idle Stop Indicator

Auto Idle StopD

riving

335

AUTO IDLE STOP INDICATOR

10/09/02 14:24:21 31TM8610_340

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Set the parking brake before you putthe transmission in Park. This keepsthe vehicle from moving and puttingpressure on the parking mechanismin the transmission.

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.in the cargo area or take themwith you.

Turn off the lights.

Make sure the windows are closed.

Lock the doors and the hatch.

Parking Tips

Parking

336

10/09/02 14:24:30 31TM8610_341

Your vehicle is equipped with frontdisc brakes. The brakes on the rearwheels are drum. A power assisthelps reduce the effort needed onthe brake pedal. The ABS helps youretain steering control when brakingvery hard.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, reduces their effectiveness andreduces brake pad life. In addition,fuel economy can be reduced. It alsokeeps your brake lights on all thetime, confusing drivers behind you.

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces theireffectiveness. Use the engine toassist the brakes by taking your footoff the accelerator and downshiftingto a lower speed.

Braking SystemD

riving

337

10/09/02 14:24:35 31TM8610_342

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

The following features are alsoequipped:

With the shift lever in D, S or L, thisfeature applies brake pressurebriefly as you release the brakepedal to prevent the vehicle frommoving unexpectedly.

This feature helps you apply thebrakes with less force during anemergency braking situation.

Creep Aid System

Brake-Assist

Braking System Design Brake Pad Wear Indicators

Braking System

338

10/09/02 14:24:41 31TM8610_343

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

When the ABS indicator comes on,you will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABSSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display.

If the ABS indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as shown onpage .418

You should never pump the brake pedal.

CONTINUED

ABS Indicator

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)D

riving

339

10/09/02 14:24:48 31TM8610_344

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the EBD system may alsobe shut down.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

It only helps with steeringcontrol during braking.

418

Important Safety Reminders ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

340

10/09/02 14:24:54 31TM8610_345

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly to the station, theninflate the tire to the recommendedpressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator may come on unexpectedly.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

When the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator is on, one or more of yourtires is significantly underinflated.You should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure as indicatedon the vehicle’s tire informationplacard.

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor. If the air pressure of a tirebecomes significantly low, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure/TPMS indicator in theinstrument panel to come on. If thishappens, you will see a ‘‘CHECKTIRE PRESSURE’’ message on themulti-information display.

If you cannot make the low tirepressure/TPMS indicator andmessage on the multi-informationdisplay go out after inflating the tiresto the specified values, have yourdealer check the system as soon aspossible.

400

CONTINUED

U.S. models only Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)D

riving

341

10/09/02 14:25:04 31TM8610_346

For example, if you check and fillyour tires in a warm area, then drivein extremely cold weather, the tirepressure will be lower thanmeasured and could be underinflatedand cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on. Or, ifyou check and adjust your tirepressure in cooler conditions, anddrive into extremely hot conditions,the tires may become overinflated.However, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come on ifthe tires are overinflated.

Refer to page for tire inflationguidelines.

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when thevehicle is cold, and set to therecommended inflation pressure asspecified on the vehicle placard andin the owner’s manual (see page

).

If there is a problem with the TPMS,you will see the above message onthe multi-information display.

If you see this message, the systemis off and is not monitoring the tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

If there is a problem with the TPMS,this indicator begins to flash. It stopsflashing after approximately 1minute, then stays on. You will alsosee a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see TPMS System Failure).

390

389

TPMS System Failure

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

342

10/09/02 14:25:11 31TM8610_347

This indicator and the warningmessage on the multi-informationdisplay will go off, after several miles(kilometers) driving, when the sparetire is replaced with the specifiedregular tire equipped with the tirepressure monitor sensor.

Also, the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator begins to flash, then stayson (see page ).

If the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator comes on, or the multi-information display shows a‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message,the VSA system automatically turnson even when the VSA system isturned off by pressing the VSA OFFswitch (see page ). If thishappens, you cannot turn the VSAsystem off by pressing the VSA OFFswitch again.

When you restart the vehicle withthe compact spare tire, the TPMSsystem message will also bedisplayed on the multi-informationdisplay after several miles(kilometers) driving.

If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure/TPMS indicator will comeon. Replace the flat tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

After the flat tire is replaced with thespare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator stays on whiledriving. After several miles(kilometers) driving, this indicatorbegins to flash, then stays on again.You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMSSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display. This is normal;the system cannot monitor the sparetire pressure. Manually check thespare tire pressure to be sure it iscorrect.

Each wheel (except the compactspare tire wheel) is equipped with atire pressure sensor. You must useTPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer orqualified technician.

341

346

401

CONTINUED

Changing a Tire with TPMS

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)D

riving

343

10/09/02 14:25:19 31TM8610_348




Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

344

10/09/02 14:25:24 31TM8610_349

The main function of theVSA system is generally known asElectronic Stability Control (ESC).The system also includes a tractioncontrol function.

If this indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA system indicator blink.

If the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator comes on (see page ),or the multi-information displayshows a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’message with the indicator flashing(see page ), the VSA systemautomatically turns on even if theVSA system is turned off with theVSA OFF switch. In this case, youcannot turn the VSA system off bypressing the VSA OFF switch again.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output andby selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. There may alsobe some noise from the VSAhydraulic system. You will also seethe VSA activation indicator blink.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

When VSA is off, the VSA OFFindicator comes on as a reminder.

341

342

On U.S. modelsVehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA OFF Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), SystemD

riving

345

NOTE:

10/09/02 14:25:33 31TM8610_350

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.This switch is under the driver’s side

vent. To turn the VSA system on andoff, press and hold it until you hear abeep.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.Press and hold the switch again. Itturns the system back on.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

In certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallowmud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA systemis off, the traction control system isalso off. You should only attempt tofree your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.

Immediately after freeing yourvehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA andtraction control systems switched off.

393

VSA and Tire SizesVSA OFF Switch

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

346

VSA OFFSWITCH

10/09/02 14:25:41 31TM8610_351

Your vehicle is not designed to tow atrailer. Attempting to do so can voidyour warranties.

Towing a TrailerD

riving

347

10/09/02 14:25:44 31TM8610_352

348

10/09/02 14:25:46 31TM8610_353

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

U.S. Vehicles: ......................Maintenance Safety . 350.................Maintenance Minder . 351

..............................Fluid Locations . 361........................Adding Engine Oil . 362

.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 364..............................Engine Coolant . 367

....................Windshield Washers . 369....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 370

Continuously Variable............Transmission (CVT) . 370

....................................Brake Fluid . 371.............................................Lights . 373

..............................Audio Antenna . 383................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 383

.....................................Floor Mats . 383..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 384

.................................Wiper Blades . 384...............................................Tires . 389

......Checking the 12 Volt Battery . 395.............................Vehicle Storage . 397

This section also includesinstructions on how to read theMaintenance Minder messages onthe multi-information display, andinstructions for simple maintenancetasks you may want to take care ofyourself.

449

Maintenance

Maintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Maintenance

349

TM

10/09/02 14:25:51 31TM8610_354

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or qualifiedmechanic.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety PrecautionsInjury from moving parts.

Burns from hot parts.

Carbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Potential Vehicle Hazards

350

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

10/09/02 14:26:00 31TM8610_355

－－－－－－－－－－－－

The remaining engine oil life isshown on the display according tothis table:

DisplayedEngine Oil Life

(%)100%90%80%70%60%50%40%30%20%15%10%5%0%

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items onthe multi-information display to showyou when you should have yourdealer perform engine oilreplacement and indicatedmaintenance service.

To see the current engine oil lifedisplayed on the multi-informationdisplay, turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, and press theSEL/RESET button on the steeringwheel repeatedly until the engine oillife is displayed.

Based on the engine operatingconditions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)

100% 91%90% 81%80% 71%70% 61%60% 51%50% 41%40% 31%30% 21%20% 16%15% 11%10% 6%5% 1%

0%

CONTINUED

Engine Oil Life Display

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

351

ENGINE OIL LIFE DISPLAY

REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE

TM

10/09/02 14:26:09 31TM8610_356

▲ ▼

When the remaining engine oil life is15 to 6 percent, the multi-informationdisplay shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUESOON’’ message along with themaintenance item code(s) indicatingthe main and sub items required atthe time of the oil change. Refer topage for a complete list of themaintenance main items and subitems.

Pressing either INFO button ( / )switches the display from themessage to another display. Onceyou switch the display, this messagewill go off.

Along with the message, the systemmessage indicator comes on (seepage ).

The message appears on the multi-information display each time youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

This message reminds you that yourvehicle will soon be due forscheduled maintenance.

Press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel repeatedly to selectthe engine oil life information. Alongwith the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ message, youwill see the percentage of theremaining engine oil life and themaintenance item codes on themulti-information display.

70

360

Maintenance Minder

352

REMAINING ENGINEOIL LIFE

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM CODE (S)

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM CODE (S)

SUB ITEM (S)

MAIN ITEM (S)

TM

10/09/02 14:26:16 31TM8610_357

－

▲ ▼

When the remaining oil life is 5 to 1percent, the multi-informationdisplay shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUENOW’’ message with the samemaintenance items ‘‘SERVICE DUESOON’’ was displayed with. Whenyou see this message, have theindicated maintenance performed assoon as possible.

Press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel repeatedly to selectthe engine oil life. The message‘‘SERVICE,’’ along with ‘‘5%,’’ and themaintenance item code are displayedon the multi-information displaywhen the calculated engine oil life is1 5 percent (see page ).

Pressing either INFO button ( / )switches the display from themessage to another display. Onceyou switch the display, this messagewill go off.

Along with the message, the systemmessage indicator comes on (seepage ).70

351

CONTINUED

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

353

TM

10/09/02 14:26:23 31TM8610_358

▲ ▼

－

If the indicated maintenance serviceis not done and the remaining engineoil life reaches 0%, the multi-information display will show themessage ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’and the maintenance item code(s).This message is displayed when thetotal distance traveled is less than 10miles (for U.S. models) or 10 km (forCanadian models) after the engineoil life became 0%.

These messages will come on everytime you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described on page .

Pressing either INFO button ( / )switches the display from themessage to another display. To seethe message again, press eitherINFO button repeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel repeatedly to selectthe engine oil life. The message‘‘SERVICE,’’ along with ‘‘0%,’’ and themaintenance item code are displayedon the multi-information displaywhen the calculated engine oil life is0 1 percent.

Along with the message, the systemmessage indicator comes on (seepage ).70

356

Maintenance Minder

354

TM

10/09/02 14:26:30 31TM8610_359

▲ ▼

If the indicated required service isnot done and the remaining engineoil life becomes 0%, the multi-information display will show a‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message,the total distance traveled after theremaining oil life became 0%, and themaintenance item code(s).

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described on page .

Pressing either INFO button ( / )switches the display from themessage to another display. To seethe message again, press eitherINFO button repeatedly.

When you press the SEL/RESETbutton to select the engine oil life,the message ‘‘SERVICE,’’ along withthe maintenance item code(s) andthe total negative distance traveledafter the oil life became 0%, will bedisplayed on the multi-informationdisplay.

This message is displayed againwhen you drive over 10 miles (forU.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadianmodels) after seeing the 0% message.

356

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

355

CANADAU.S.U.S. CANADA

NEGATIVE DISTANCE TRAVELED

NEGATIVE DISTANCE TRAVELEDMAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)

TM

10/09/02 14:26:37 31TM8610_360

▲ ▼

All the maintenance items displayedin the multi-information display arein code.

For an explanation of themaintenance codes, see page .

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display thenext time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

If the engine oil life is notdisplayed, press the SEL/RESETbutton on the steering wheelrepeatedly.

Press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton on the steering wheel formore than 10 seconds. Theremaining engine oil life resetmode will be shown on the multi-information display.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the Maintenance Minder asfollows:

1.2.

3.

360

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay

Maintenance Minder

356

ENGINE OIL LIFEDISPLAY

MESSAGEDISPLAY

MAINTENANCESUB ITEMS

SEL/RESET BUTTON

INFO BUTTONS ( / )

MAINTENANCEMAIN ITEM

LX and EX models

TM

10/09/02 14:26:47 31TM8610_361

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

CONTINUED

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show thecorrect maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

Select ‘‘RESET’’ by pressing theINFO ( / ) button, then pressthe SEL/RESET button to resetthe engine oil life display. Themaintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’ If you want tocancel the oil life reset mode,select ‘‘CANCEL.’’

4.

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions

Maintenance

357

INFO BUTTON( / )

SEL/RESETBUTTON

DX model

TM

10/09/02 14:26:53 31TM8610_362

We recommend using Honda partsand fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same highquality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out yourHonda Service History or CanadianMaintenance Log. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.

Maintenance Minder

358

TM

10/09/02 14:26:57 31TM8610_363

－

－

－

－

－

－

＃

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,turn signals, brake lights, andlicense plate light monthly. Seepage .

U.S. Vehicles:According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by the multi-information display. 301

370

371

389

373

302

CONTINUED

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

359

TM

10/09/02 14:27:05 31TM8610_364

＊

＊

＃

＃

＊

＃

Maintenance Minder

360

:

TM

Maintenance Main ItemsReplace engine oilReplace engine oil and oil filterInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Maintenance Sub ItemsRotate tiresReplace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

Replace dust and pollen filterIf you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry andfrom diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

Inspect drive beltReplace transmission fluidReplace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceReplace engine coolant

AB

Symbol Symbol12

34

5If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 monthsafter the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first columnon page .

Independent of the Maintenance Minder information, replace the brakefluid every 3 years.

NOTE:

:

359

Main

tenance

Min

der

10/09/02 14:27:12 31TM8610_365

Fluid LocationsM

aintenance

361

RADIATOR CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION (CVT)FLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

10/09/02 14:27:15 31TM8610_366

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on the valve cover. Pour theoil slowly and carefully so you do notspill any. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 0W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes, and recheck the oil level onthe engine oil dipstick. Do not fillabove the upper mark; you coulddamage the engine.

Adding Engine Oil

Recommended Engine Oil

362

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

10/09/02 14:27:21 31TM8610_367

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred0W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines’’.

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label. You may use a synthetic motor oil if

it meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Sealand it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the multi-information display.

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

A very low-viscosity, fuel-efficient0W-20 oil is the engine lubricant foryour Insight. This oil is formulated tohelp your engine use less fuel.

Adding Engine Oil

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Maintenance

363

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

10/09/02 14:27:28 31TM8610_368

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap.

Remove the screws with a Phillips-head screwdriver, and clips with aflat-tip screwdriver, then pull theunder-cover down.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the multi-information display. The oil and filtercollect contaminants that candamage your engine if they are notremoved regularly.

1.

2.3.

Changing the Oil and Filter

364

SCREW

CLIP

SCREWS

10/09/02 14:27:34 31TM8610_369

CONTINUED

Remove the oil drain bolt andwasher from the bottom of theengine. Drain the oil into anappropriate container.

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Make sure the oil filter gasket isnot stuck to the contacting surfaceof the engine. If it is, remove itbefore installing a new oil filter.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Refill the engine with therecommended oil.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

Make sure to clean off any dirtand dust on the contacting surfaceof a new oil filter.

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

7.

8.4. 5.

6.

Changing the Oil and FilterM

aintenance

365

WASHER OIL FILTER

BOLT

3.4 US qt (3.2 )

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

10/09/02 14:27:43 31TM8610_370

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel on the dipstick. If necessary,add more oil.

Put the under-cover back in placeand reinstall the holding clips andscrews. Lock the clips securely bypushing on the center of each clip.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

9.

10.

11.

12.

Changing the Oil and Filter

366

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

10/09/02 14:27:48 31TM8610_371

－－

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to between theMIN and MAX lines. Inspect thecooling system for leaks.

Always use Honda Long-life Anti-freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolantis pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent distilledwater. Never add straight antifreezeor plain water.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine CoolantM

aintenance

367

RESERVE TANK

If you regularly drive your vehicleunder severe conditions in very lowtemperature (under 31°F, 35°C), ahigher concentration of coolant shouldbe used. Consult your Honda dealerf or more inf ormation on the propercoolant.

10/09/02 14:27:56 31TM8610_372

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

Relieve any pressure in the coolingsystem by turning the radiator capcounterclockwise, withoutpressing down.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Engine Coolant

368

RADIATOR CAP

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

10/09/02 14:28:04 31TM8610_373

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

Check the fluid level by removingthe cap and looking at the levelgauge.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition them.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

If the washer fluid is low, a‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ messageappears on the multi-informationdisplay.

On U.S. models

On all Canadian models

Windshield WashersM

aintenance

369

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

10/09/02 14:28:11 31TM8610_374

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. There is a HOTside and a COLD side on thedipstick. The fluid level should bebetween the upper and lowermarks on the HOT side.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Start the engine, let it run until theradiator fan comes on, then shutoff the engine. For accurateresults, wait about 60 seconds (butno longer than 90 seconds) beforedoing step 2.

3.

4.2.

1.

Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT)

Automatic Transmission Fluid

370

DIPSTICK

HOTRange

UPPERMARK

LOWERMARK

10/09/02 14:28:18 31TM8610_375

CONTINUED

Check the brake fluid level in thereservoirs monthly.

You will also see the ‘‘BRAKEFLUID LOW’’ message on the multi-information display when the brakefluid level is low.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid when thisservice is indicated by a maintenancemessage on the multi-informationdisplay.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the dipstickhole to bring it to the levelbetween the upper and lowermarks.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda CVTF(continuously variabletransmission fluid).

Independent of the MaintenanceMinder information, replace thebrake fluid every 3 years.

6.5.

Automatic Transmission Fluid, Brake Fluid

Brake Fluid

Maintenance

371

10/09/02 14:28:26 31TM8610_376

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Brake Fluid

372

MAX

MIN

10/09/02 14:28:31 31TM8610_377

CONTINUED

Open the hood.

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its base, and protect the glassfrom contact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thecargo area, readjustment may berequired. Adjustments should bedone by your dealer or anotherqualified technician.

To change the bulb on the rightside, remove the upper part of thewindshield washer reservoir tank.Use a flat-tip screwdriver toremove the holding clip, thenremove the upper part by pulling itstraight up.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the cover by pushing on thetab to unlock it, then slide theconnector off the cover.

Remove the cover on the back ofthe headlight assembly by turningit counterclockwise.

1. 2.

3.

Headlight Aiming

Replacing a Headlight Bulb

Lights

High Beam Headlight

Maintenance

373

HOLDING CLIP

CONNECTOR

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

10/09/02 14:28:41 31TM8610_378

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the bulb from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Install the new bulb, and turn itone-quarter turn clockwise to lockit in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Reinstall the cover over the backof the headlight assembly and turnit clockwise to lock it in place.Push the electrical connector backonto the cover.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

4. 5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Lights

374

BULB

COVER

CONNECTOR

10/09/02 14:28:49 31TM8610_379

Install the new bulb, and turn itone-quarter turn clockwise to lockit in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Install the upper part of thewindshield washer reservoir tankin the reverse order of removal.

Remove the bulb from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Open the hood.

(Right side)

3.

4.

5.

6.

2.

1.

10.

Lights

Low Beam Headlight

Maintenance

375

BULB

CONNECTOR

10/09/02 14:28:58 31TM8610_380

Open the hood.To change the bulb on the rightside, remove the upper part of thewindshield washer reservoir tank.Use a flat-tip screwdriver toremove the holding clip, thenremove the upper part by pulling itstraight up.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Install the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Install the upper part of thewindshield washer reservoir tankin the reverse order of removal.

(Right side)6.

1. 2.

3.

4.

5.

Lights

Replacing a Front Parking LightBulb

376

BULBHOLDING CLIP

SOCKET

10/09/02 14:29:06 31TM8610_381

Place a cloth on the edge of thelight assembly garnish to preventscratches. Remove the cover bycarefully prying in the notch on itsleft edge with a flat-tip screwdriver.

Remove the socket from the frontturn signal light assembly byturning it one-quarter turncounterclockwise.


Insert the socket back into thefront turn signal light assembly.Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.


Install the light assembly in thereverse order of removal. Makesure to secure the bolt.

Install the garnish in the originalposition securely.

Remove the bolt and pull the frontturn light assembly from thebumper while taking the tab outfrom the holder.

5.

6.

1.

7.

8.

3.

4.

2.

Lights

Replacing the Front Turn SignalLight Bulb

Maintenance

377

TAB

BOLTGARNISH

NOTCH

BULB

10/09/02 14:29:16 31TM8610_382

Open the hood.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.


Install the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.


2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

Lights

Replacing a Front Side MarkerLight Bulb

378

BULB

SOCKET

10/09/02 14:29:22 31TM8610_383

CONTINUED

Open the hatch.

Push on the area of the trim asshown in the illustration above todetach the upper hooks from thelight assembly.

Pry on the gap between the trimand light assembly carefully with aflat-tip screwdriver to detach thelower hooks.

Make sure that all hooks areremoved from the light assembly.Unclip the top half of the trimfrom the body by pulling it out.Then unclip the bottom half.

1.

2.

3. 4.

Lights

Replacing the Rear Bulbs

Maintenance

379

HOOKS

TRIM

HOOKS

CLIP

CLIP

10/09/02 14:29:30 31TM8610_384

Remove the two mounting boltswith an 8 mm wrench.

Pull the rear of the light assemblyout as shown in the illustrationabove ( ), then push theassembly back to the originalposition carefully ( ). The frontpart of the rear light assemblyraises slightly ( ).

Determine which of the threebulbs is burned out: back-up light,turn signal, or side marker.

Pull the whole light assemblyoutwards from the body carefully.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the burned out bulb bypulling it straight out of its socket.

6.

7.

5. 8.

9.

10.

Lights

380

BOLT

ORIGINALPOSITION

Front

Front

Left side

BULB

SOCKETSNAP FASTENERS

Left side

10/09/02 14:29:39 31TM8610_385

Install the new bulb in the socketby pushing it straight in the socketuntil it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly. Turn it clockwise tolock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

When reinstalling the taillightassembly, align and pop the snapfasteners in place. Reinstall andtighten the two mounting bolts. To reinstall the trim, set the

bottom edge of the trim in theoriginal position and push thebottom half of the trim to clip itback securely. Then push theupper half of the trim to securethe top clip.

Secure the hooks by pushing onthe areas of the trim as shown inthe illustration above.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15. 16.

LightsM

aintenance

381

10/09/02 14:29:46 31TM8610_386

Each outside mirror has side turnsignal lights. The lights should bereplaced by your dealer.

The high-mount brake light shouldbe replaced by your dealer.

The license plate has two lightsabove it. The bulbs should bereplaced by your dealer.

EX models

Lights

Side Turn Signal Lights

Rear License Plate Light Bulbs

High-mount Brake Light

382

10/09/02 14:29:51 31TM8610_387

Before using an automatic car wash,remove the audio antenna so it doesnot get damaged. Remove theantenna by unscrewing it. When youreinstall the antenna, tighten itsecurely.

Before entering or parking in areaswith low ceiling height, remove theantenna.

The driver’s floor mat that camewith your vehicle hooks over thefloor mat anchors. To lock eachanchor, turn the knob clockwise.This keeps the floor mat from slidingforward and possibly interfering withthe pedals.

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air dry beforeyou use the vehicle.Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

When cleaning or replacing, turn theknob counterclockwise to unhookthe floor mat. CONTINUED

On LX and EX models

Floor MatsCleaning the Seat BeltsAudio Antenna

Audio Antenna, Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor MatsM

aintenance

383

LOOP

To unlock

Driver’s floor mat is shown.

10/09/02 14:30:01 31TM8610_388

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every 6 months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, and areasthat are getting hard or if they leavestreaks and unwiped areas whenused.

If you remove a floor mat, make sureto re-anchor it when you put it backin your vehicle.

If you use a non-Honda floor mat,make sure it fits properly and that itcan be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mats.

Make sure the rear floor mats areproperly positioned. If not, the floormat will interfere with the seatoperation and make the frontpassenger’s weight sensorsineffective.

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the climate controlsystem.

Have your dealer replace the filterwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on the multi-information display. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air, or if the flow fromthe climate control system becomesless than usual.

Wiper BladesDust and Pollen Filter

Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter, Wiper Blades

384

10/09/02 14:30:08 31TM8610_389

To replace a wiper blade:

Raise each wiper arm off thewindshield, lifting the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm:

When replacing a wiper blade,make sure not to drop the wiperblade or wiper arm down on thewindshield.

Put a cloth on the edge of thelock tab to prevent scratches,then push up on the lock tabcarefully with a flat-tipscrewdriver.

Pivot the blade assembly towardthe wiper arm until it releasesfrom the wiper arm.1.

2.

CONTINUED

Wiper BladesM

aintenance

385

WIPER ARMS LOCK TAB

WIPER ARM

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and wiper arms.

10/09/02 14:30:18 31TM8610_390

Remove the blade from its holderby grabbing the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Make sure the two rubber tabsinside the blade fit to each notch ofthe reinforcement, as shown.

Make sure the blade is completelyinstalled.

Place the top of the wiper blade onthe end of the blade assembly, andslide the blade onto the assembly.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

3.

4.

5.

Wiper Blades

386

BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

BLADE

10/09/02 14:30:26 31TM8610_391

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Make sure the blade is completelyinstalled and that its edge is notbunched up.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield, the passenger’sside first, then the driver’s side.

To replace a rear wiper blade:

Raise the wiper arm off the rearwindow.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pivoting theblade assembly upward.

6.

7.

8.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Wiper BladesM

aintenance

387

REAR

10/09/02 14:30:33 31TM8610_392

Lower the wiper arm against thewindshield.

Install the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Slide the new blade into the holder.Make sure it is engaged in the slotalong its full length.Insert both ends of the blade intothe holder. Make sure they aresecure.

Pull one end of the blade out fromthe holder.Slide the blade out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

3.

5.

4.

6.

7.

Wiper Blades

388

BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

10/09/02 14:30:40 31TM8610_393

CONTINUED

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) warns you when a tirepressure is low. See page formore information.

Even though your vehicle isequipped with TPMS, werecommend that you visually checkyour tires every day. If you think atire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at least 3hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

341

On U.S. models

On U.S. models

On all Canadian models

Tires Inflation Guidelines

TiresM

aintenance

389

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

10/09/02 14:30:52 31TM8610_394

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot (driven for severalmiles/kilometers), you will seereadings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .434

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure

Tires

Recommended Tire Pressures Tire Inspection

390

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

175/65R15 84S33 psi (230 kPa ,2.3 kgf/cm )

Front/Rear:

10/09/02 14:31:02 31TM8610_395

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see a 1/2inch (12.7 mm) wide band across thetread. This shows there is less than1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left onthe tire.

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

The service life of your tires isdependent on many factors,including, but not limited to, drivinghabits, road conditions, vehicleloading, inflation pressure,maintenance history, speed, andenvironmental conditions (evenwhen the tires are not in use).

In addition to your regularinspections and inflation pressuremaintenance, it is recommended thatyou have annual inspectionsperformed once the tires reach fiveyears old. It is also recommendedthat all tires, including the spare, beremoved from service after 10 yearsfrom the date of manufacture,regardless of their condition or stateof wear.The last four digits of the TIN (tireidentification number) are found onthe sidewall of the tire and indicatethe date of manufacture (See

on page ).

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

435

Tires

Tire Service Life

TireLabeling

Tire Maintenance

Maintenance

391

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.

10/09/02 14:31:11 31TM8610_396

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe multi-information display. Movethe tires to the positions shown inthe illustration each time they arerotated. If you purchase directionaltires, rotate only front-to-back.

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

When the tires are rotated, makesure the air pressures are checked.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels. If you do not, thetire pressure monitoring system willnot work.

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS and vehicle stability assistsystem (VSA) to work inconsistently.

The ABS and VSA system work bycomparing the speed of each wheel.When replacing tires, use the samesize originally supplied with thevehicle. Tire size and constructioncan affect wheel speed and maycause the system to activate.

On U.S. models

Tires

Tire Rotation Replacing Tires and Wheels

392

Front Front

(Front Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(Front DirectionalTires and Wheels)

10/09/02 14:31:20 31TM8610_397

＋

CONTINUED

Wheels:

Tires:

See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page

for tire size information.

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Honda stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow, made by Security ChainCompany (SCC).

Mount tire chains on your tires whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

Cable-type: SCC RADIAL CHAINSC1026

434

435

Tires

Wheel and Tire Specifications

Winter Driving

Snow Tires

Tire Chains

Maintenance

393

15 x 5 1/2 J

175/65R15 84S

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

10/09/02 14:31:30 31TM8610_398

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Clean the wheels as you would therest of the exterior. Wash them withthe same solution, and rinse themthoroughly.

Aluminum alloy wheels have aprotective clear-coat that keeps thealuminum from corroding andtarnishing. Cleaning the wheels withharsh chemicals (including somecommercial wheel cleaners) or a stiffbrush can damage the clear-coat. Toclean the wheels, use a milddetergent and a soft brush or sponge.

If equipped

Tires

Wheels

394

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

10/09/02 14:31:36 31TM8610_399

－

Check the condition of the 12 voltbattery monthly by looking at thetest indicator window. The label onthe battery explains the testindicator’s colors.

If your vehicle’s 12 volt battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the IMAbattery level gauge reading will notbe correct the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It will show less than theactual level temporarily. It will showthe correct level after you drive forat least 30 minutes.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfurther corrosion.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last. CONTINUED

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the 12 Volt BatteryM

aintenance

395

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

10/09/02 14:31:43 31TM8610_400

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected, or goes dead, the timesetting may be lost. To reset the time,see page .

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the audiosystem may disable itself. The nexttime you turn on the radio, you willsee ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the code (see page

).

The navigation system will alsodisable itself. The next time you turnon the ignition switch, the systemwill require you to enter a PINbefore it can be used. Refer to thenavigation system manual.

266

265

On vehicles with navigation system

Checking the 12 Volt Battery

396

10/09/02 14:31:48 31TM8610_401

Fill the fuel tank.

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Park.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the 12 volt battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, such

as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

Reconnect the 12 volt battery anddrive your vehicle every month forabout 30 minutes. This will keepthe IMA battery charged and ingood condition.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle on and offtwice). Preferably, do this once amonth.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand hatch seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand hatch seals.

Vehicle StorageM

aintenance

397

If this vehicle is unused f or over onemonth, the service lif e of the 100VNickel-Metal Hydride battery will bereduced and the battery may bepermanently damaged.

10/09/02 14:31:57 31TM8610_402

398

10/09/02 14:32:01 31TM8610_403

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 400....................Changing a Flat Tire . 401

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 408................................Jump Starting . 410

..............If the Engine Overheats . 412.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 415

12 Volt Battery Charging System.....................................Indicator . 416

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 417...............Brake System Indicator . 418

..............................................Fuses . 419..............................Fuse Locations . 424

......................Emergency Towing . 426..........If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 427

Taking Care of the UnexpectedTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

399

10/09/02 14:32:04 31TM8610_404

Check the air pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement tire should be the samesize and design, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater cautionwhile driving.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tire.

After the flat tire is replaced withthe spare tire, the low tirepressure/TPMS indicator stays onwhile driving. After several miles(kilometers) driving, this indicatorbegins to flash, then stays onagain. You will also see a ‘‘CHECKTPMS SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display. This isnormal; the system cannotmonitor the spare tire pressure.Manually check the spare tirepressure to be sure it is correct.

On U.S. models

Compact Spare Tire

400

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

10/09/02 14:32:13 31TM8610_405

CONTINUED

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area to stopthat is far away from the traffic lanes.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park. Apply theparking brake.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Open the hatch.

Remove the cargo area floor bycarefully pulling the front edge ofthe floor straight up.

4.

3.

2.

1.

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

401

HOLDER

FLOOR

TAB

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

10/09/02 14:32:21 31TM8610_406

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

Take the box out of the spare tire.

Take the spare tire casing out ofthe cargo area.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

Remove the jack compartmentcover by pulling the knob.

Turn the jack’s end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.

6.

7.

10.5. 8.

9.

Changing a Flat Tire

402

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

BOX JACK KNOB

COVERSPARE TIRECASING SPARE TIRE

10/09/02 14:32:29 31TM8610_407

CONTINUED

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Handle thewheel nuts carefully; they may behot from driving. Place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

Remove the wheel cover bycarefully prying under its edgewith the flat tip of the extension.

11. 13.

14.

12.Insight and LX models


Care

ofthe

Unexpected

403

WHEEL NUT WRENCH EXTENSION

JACKING POINTS EXTENSION WHEEL NUT

WHEEL COVER

10/09/02 14:32:39 31TM8610_408

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

18.

17.

16.

15.


404

BRAKE HUB

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

10/09/02 14:32:46 31TM8610_409

CONTINUED

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

Remove the carpet from the sparetire casing and store it in thecasing.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.Store the box in the wheel of theflat tire.

Remove the center cap (ifequipped) before storing the flattire in the cargo area well.

Install the spare tire casing in theoriginal position in the spare tirewell.

20.

21.

19.

22.

23.

24.

EX models


Care

ofthe

Unexpected

405

SPACER CONE

WING BOLTFor normal tire

For compactspare tire

CARPET

SPARE TIRECASING

CENTER CAP

BOX

10/09/02 14:32:55 31TM8610_410

Your vehicle’s original tire has atire pressure monitoring systemsensor. To replace a tire, refer to

(seepage ).

Store the center cap in the cargoarea. Make sure it does not getscratched or damaged.

Store the tools in the spare tirecasing and the jack in its holder.Turn the jack’s end bracketclockwise to lock it in place, andreinstall the cover.

Place the cargo area floor in itsoriginal position. Close the hatch.

25.

26.

27.

28.

343

U.S. models only


Changing a Tire with TPMS

406

FLOOR

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

10/09/02 14:33:01 31TM8610_411

Make sure the wire support ring ishooked into the clips around theedge of the wheel cover.

Align the valve mark on the wheelcover to the tire valve on thewheel, then install the wheel cover.

Make sure the wire support ring ison the outer side of the tire valveas shown.

1.2. 3.Insight and LX models


Installing a wheel cover

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

407

CLIPS CLIPS WIRE SUPPORT RING

10/09/02 14:33:08 31TM8610_412

The engine normally starts with theIMA motor. If the engine does notstart while the IMA battery charge isnormally sufficient, check thefollowing:

Check the transmission interlock.The transmission must be in Parkor neutral or the starter will notoperate.

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

127

315419

If the Engine Won’t Start

Starting theEngine

408

10/09/02 14:33:14 31TM8610_413

When the IMA battery charge is low,the starter motor is used to start theengine. If the engine does not start,check the following:

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the 12 volt battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe 12 volt battery and terminalconnections (see page ). Youcan then try jump starting thevehicle from a booster 12 voltbattery (see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. See

on page .

410

426

395

410

426

If the Engine Won’t Start

EmergencyTowing

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

409

10/09/02 14:33:19 31TM8610_414

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

To jump start your vehicle:

The numbers in the illustration showyou the order to connect the jumpercables.

You cannot start your vehicle bypushing or pulling it.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the 12 voltbattery.

Turn off all the electricalaccessories: climate control, audiosystem, lights, etc. Put thetransmission in Park, and set theparking brake.

1.

2.

Jump Starting

410

BOOSTERBATTERY

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

10/09/02 14:33:26 31TM8610_415

－＋

＋

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

7.

6.

4.

5.

3.

CONTINUED

Jump StartingTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

411

10/09/02 14:33:35 31TM8610_416

If your vehicle’s 12 volt battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the IMAbattery level gauge reading will notbe correct the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It will show less than theactual level temporarily. It will showthe correct level after you drive forat least 30 minutes.

The high temperature indicatorshould be off under most conditions.If the engine coolant temperaturegets higher than normal, theindicator will blink. If it stays on, youshould determine the reason (hotday, driving up a steep hill, etc.).

You will also see a ‘‘WATER TEMPHOT’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

If the vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the hightemperature indicator blinking orremaining on. Or you may see steamor spray coming from under thehood.

67

If the Engine Overheats

Jump Starting, If the Engine Overheats

412

Driving with the high temperatureindicator on can cause serious damageto your engine.

10/09/02 14:33:40 31TM8610_417

CONTINUED

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Park, andset the parking brake. Turn off allthe accessories, and turn on thehazard warning lights.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andcheck the high temperatureindicator. If the high heat is due tooverloading, the engine shouldstart to cool down almostimmediately. If it does, wait untilthe high temperature indicatorgoes off, then continue driving.

If the high temperature indicatorstays on, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page

). Add coolant if the level isbelow the MIN mark.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the hightemperature indicator goes offbefore checking the radiator.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

426

302


EmergencyTowing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

413

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

10/09/02 14:33:49 31TM8610_418

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Start the engine, and set thetemperature to maximum heat(climate control to AUTO at‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have theproper coolant mixture available,you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe high temperature indicator. Ifit begins to blink or comes onagain, the engine needs repair(see on page

).

8.

9.

10.

11.

426


Emergency Towing

414

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

10/09/02 14:33:54 31TM8610_419

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

The engine running generates the oilpressure. When the Auto Idle Stop isactivated, the engine is stopped, theoil pressure is dropped, and the lowoil pressure indicator does not comeon.

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning lights.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

This indicator should nevercome on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message onthe multi-information display whenthis indicator comes on.

1.

2.

3.

4.

301

362

426

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Emergency Towing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

415

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

10/09/02 14:34:01 31TM8610_420

－－

If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, the 12volt battery is not being charged.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKCHARGING SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

This indicator may blink after youstart the vehicle in the morningwhen the temperature is below

20°F ( 30°C). It will stopblinking when the IMA batterywarms up.

63

12 Volt Battery Charging System Indicator

416

10/09/02 14:34:06 31TM8610_421

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may turn off as youcontinue driving, have your vehiclechecked by your dealer as soon aspossible.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If the indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

If your vehicle’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It can take severaldays of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for an emissionstest until the readiness codes are set.Refer to formore information (see page ).

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. You will also see a‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message onthe multi-information display.Tighten the cap until it clicks at leastonce (see page ). Tightening thecap will not turn the indicator offimmediately; it can take several daysof normal driving.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKEMISSION SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display. Formore information, see page .89

299 442

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Readiness Code Emissions Testing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

417

If you keep driving with theMalf unction Indicator Lamp on, youcan damage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties. This indicator may alsocome on with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.

10/09/02 14:34:14 31TM8610_422

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

Slow down and pull to the side of theroad when it is safe. Because of thelong distance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If this indicator comes on for anyother reason, have your vehicleinspected by your dealer. There maybe a malfunction with the electricbrake distribution (EBD) system.Avoid hard braking and high speeddriving.

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

The brake system indicator normallycomes on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position and asa reminder to check the parkingbrake. If you do not release theparking brake, the indicator will stayon, and you will see a ‘‘RELEASEPARKING BRAKE’’ message on themulti-information display.

You will also see a ‘‘BRAKE FLUIDLOW’’ or ‘‘CHECK BRAKESYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

371

426

89

Brake System Indicator

EmergencyTowing

(Red)

418

U.S. Canada

10/09/02 14:34:21 31TM8610_423

The vehicle’s fuses are contained inthree fuse boxes.

The interior fuse box is behind thedashboard on the driver’s side.

The interior fuse box label isattached on the back side of thecover. To see the interior fuse boxlabel, remove the cover by pulling ittoward you while holding the bottomcenter part of cover.

CONTINUED

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

419

INTERIOR

COVER

LABEL

FUSE BOX

10/09/02 14:34:28 31TM8610_424

The under-hood fuse box is locatednext to the battery. To open it, pushthe tab as shown.

The under-hood fuse is on thepositive terminal of the battery. Toopen it, push the tabs as shown.

Fuses

420

TABUNDER-HOOD

TAB(On the battery)

Next to the battery

10/09/02 14:34:33 31TM8610_425

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that device. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isthe cause. Replace any blown fuses,and check if the device works.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

Remove the cover from the under-hood fuse box located on thebattery (see page ).

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box on the 12volt battery by looking throughthe top at the wire inside.Replacement of these fuses shouldbe done by your dealer.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse boxes and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided in the interior fusebox.

1. 2. 4.

3.

424 425

420

CONTINUED

Checking and Replacing Fuses

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

421

BLOWN

FUSE PULLER

10/09/02 14:34:42 31TM8610_426

Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace the fusewith one of the spare fuses of thesame rating or lower.

The fuse puller is in the interior fusebox.

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate that anything is wrong.Replace the fuse with one of thecorrect rating as soon as you can.

5.

Fuses

422

BLOWNFUSE PULLER

10/09/02 14:34:47 31TM8610_427

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified technician.

When the audio system is disabled,the clock setting in the audio systemwill be canceled. You will need toreset the clock according to theinstructions in the audio systemsection in this owner’s manual.

6.

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

423

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

10/09/02 14:34:51 31TM8610_428

－

－－

－

－

＊

＊

No. No. Amps.Amps. Circuits ProtectedCircuits Protected1234567891011121314151617

18

19

202122

23242526272829303132333435363738394041424344

10 A10 A

10 A30 A20 A10 A30 A7.5 A10 A20 A10 A15 A15 A30 A15 A15 A

10 A7.5 A7.5 A

15 A(7.5 A)

20 A

10 A10 A10 A7.5 A

7.5 A7.5 A10 A20 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A20 A

20 A

20 A

15 A15 A7.5 A

HazardStop/HornNot UsedLAFDoor Lock MainHeadlight MainSmall LightRadiator Fan MotorIGPSRight Headlight Low BeamIG CoilLeft Headlight Low BeamDoor Lock Motor 2 (Lock)Door Lock Motor 1 (Lock)ABS/VSA FSRSelectable Door LockIGPNot UsedNot UsedIMA 1MG ClutchSTS

Back UpTPMSDriver’s Power WindowNot UsedBack Up LightSRSTransmission SOLOPDSNot UsedA/CABS/VSAIMAACC SocketAccessoryDaytime Running LightRear WiperFront Passenger’s PowerWindowRear Passenger’s SidePower WindowRear Driver’s Side PowerWindowFuel PumpWasherMeter

: U.S. models

Fuse Locations

424

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

10/09/02 14:34:58 31TM8610_429

－

－

－

＊＊＊

＊＊

＊

＊＊

No. Circuits Protected

No.

Amps.

Amps.

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected

12

Ignition Coil (EX)Ignition Coil (IN)

454647484950515253545556575859

6015 A15 A

7.5 A

30 A10 A15 A15 A10 A15 A10 A

10 A30 A30 A30 A30 A40 A

50 A

123

100 A60 A20 A

Battery, Main, ACGEPSHorn, Stop, Hazard

Hatch LockNot UsedCondenser Fan MotorLeft Headlight High BeamDoor Lock Motor 2 (Unlock)Door Lock Motor 1 (Unlock)Right Headlight High BeamDBWIMA 2Not UsedHeated MirrorFront WiperBlower MotorABS/VSA MotorRear DefoggerRear DefoggerNot UsedIG Main

1 :2 :3 :

Insight model and U.S. LX modelCanadian modelsEX models

2, 3

1

2, 3

Fuse LocationsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

425

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOXES

On the battery Next to the battery

10/09/02 14:35:06 31TM8610_430

－

－

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do this:

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the vehicle no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

There are two ways to tow yourvehicle:

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front) and lift themoff the ground. The other two tiresremain on the ground.

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

Start the engine.Shift to the D position and hold for5 seconds, then to N.Turn off the engine.Release the parking brake.Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

Wheel-lif t Equipment

Flat-bed Equipment

This is anacceptable way to tow yourvehicle.

This is the best way totransport your vehicle.

Emergency Towing

426

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine, your vehicle must betransported with the f ront wheels of fthe ground.

10/09/02 14:35:14 31TM8610_431

To use the towing hook:

Remove the cover from the frontbumper using your fingers, or pryit off using a cloth and a flat-tipscrewdriver to prevent scratches.

If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,mud, or snow, call a towing serviceto pull it out (see page ).

For very short distances, such asfreeing the vehicle, you can use thedetachable towing hook that mountson the anchor in the front bumper.

Remove the towing hook andwheel nut wrench from the toolcase in the cargo area.

1.

2.

426

CONTINUED

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets StuckTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

427

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle’s weight.

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

10/09/02 14:35:22 31TM8610_432

Screw the towing hook into thehole, and tighten it with the wheelnut wrench.

3.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

428

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

To avoid damage to your vehicle, usethe towing hook f or straight, f latground towing only. Do not tow at anangle. The tow hook should not be usedto tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Donot use it as a tie down.

10/09/02 14:35:26 31TM8610_433

－

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 430................................Specifications . 432

DOT Tire Quality Grading......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 434

Uniform Tire Quality..................................Grading . 434.................................Treadwear . 434

......................................Traction . 434.............................Temperature . 435

.................................Tire Labeling . 435Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) Required Federal............................Explanation . 437

.......................Emissions Controls . 439.....................The Clean Air Act . 439

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 439

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 439

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 439

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 440....................PGM-FI System . 440

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 440

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 440

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 440

....................Replacement Parts . 440..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 441

........................Emissions Testing . 442

Technical InformationTechnicalInform

ation

429

10/09/02 14:35:30 31TM8610_434

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

The VIN is also located on theengine bulkhead. Remove the coveron the engine compartmentbulkhead to view the VIN. Alwaysclose the cover when finished.

Identif ication Numbers

430

COVER

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

CERTIFICATION LABEL

10/09/02 14:35:34 31TM8610_435

The engine number is stamped intothe engine block.

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The IMA Motor Number is stampedon the motor housing.

Identif ication NumbersTechnicalInform

ation

431

ENGINE NUMBER

TRANSMISSION NUMBER

IMA MOTOR NUMBER

10/09/02 14:35:39 31TM8610_436

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications

432

Dimensions

Weights

Seating Capacities

Capacities

Engine

172.3 in (4,377 mm)66.7 in (1,695 mm)56.2 in (1,427 mm)100.4 in (2,550 mm)58.7 in (1,492 mm)58.3 in (1,482 mm)

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

3.4 US qt (3.2 )3.2 US qt (3.0 )4.0 US qt (3.8 )

TotalFrontRear

523

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity: 0.116 US gal (0.44 )

2.6 US qt (2.5 )5.12 US qt (4.85 )

Fuel tank

EnginecoolantEngine oil

Automatictransmissionfluid (CVTF)Windshieldwasherreservoir

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs DILFR6F11G

10.8 : 182 cu-in (1,339 cm )

2.87 x 3.15 in (73.0 x 80.0 mm)

3.0 US qt (2.8 )5.5 US qt (5.2 )

10.6 US gal (40 )1.202 US gal (4.55 )1.332 US gal (5.04 )

Water cooled 4-stroke SOHCi-VTEC gasoline engine with

Hybrid Electric Motor

FrontRear

Approx.

1 :

2 :

(NGK)

ChangeTotalChange

Including filterWithout filter

TotalChangeTotal

U.S. VehiclesCanada Vehicles

1

2

10/09/02 14:35:53 31TM8610_437

－－

±－ ±

±± ±± ±

－－

＊＊

－－－－－

－

－－－－－－

－

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

SpecificationsTechnicalInform

ation

433

Air Conditioning

Tires

Alignment

Fuses

12 Volt Battery

Lights

HFC-134a (R-134a)15.8 17.6 oz (450 500 g)

SP-10

12 V 60 W

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant oil type

12 V 55 W

Size

Pressure

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

Interior

Under-hood

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )

175/65R15 84S

3°20’ 1°1.5° 1°0° 1°

Capacity 12 V12 V

35 AH/20 HR28 AH/5 HR

12 V 21 W

T135/80D15 99M

12 V 5 W

Headlights

Front turn signal lightsFront parking lightsFront side marker lightsSide turn signal lights(door mirror)Rear turn signal lightsStop/taillightsBack-up lightsRear side marker lightsLicense plate lightsSpot lightsCeiling lightCargo area lightHigh-mount brake lightGlove box light 12 V 3.4 W

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

5 W8 W8 W5 W2 CP16 W

12 V 21 W

Replacement of a light bulb should be done by your dealer.

5 W12 V

See page 424 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door under the steeringcolumn.See page 425 or the fuse boxcover.

0.10 0.10 in (2.5 2.5 mm)0 0.12 in (0 3 mm)Front

RearFrontRearFront

HighLow

Front/RearSpareFront/RearSpare

1 :2 :

(HB3)(H11)(Amber)

LED type

LED type

LED type

EX models

(Amber)in

1

1

1

2

2

2

10/09/02 14:36:17 31TM8610_438

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample:

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

434

10/09/02 14:36:25 31TM8610_439

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

CONTINUED

Temperature Tire Labeling

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles), Tire LabelingTechnicalInform

ation

435

(4) (3) (2)

(1)

(1)

(1)(2)(3)(4)

TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE

Tire Size

Maximum Tire PressureMaximum Tire Load

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

10/09/02 14:36:33 31TM8610_440

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－－

－

Tire type code.

Date of manufacture.

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following example.TIN is located on the sidewall of thetire.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

YearWeek

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

Cold Tire Pressure The tire airpressure when the vehicle has beenparked for at least three hours ordriven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Load Rating Means the maximumload that a tire is rated to carry for agiven inflation pressure.

Maximum Inflation Pressure Themaximum tire air pressure that thetire can hold.

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampleof tire size with an explanation ofwhat each component means.

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Rim diameter in inches.

R

DOT

2202

S

65

15

175

84

EUYU

2KNR

Tire Labeling

Tire Size

Tire Identif ication Number (TIN)

Glossary of Tire Terminology

436

DOT EUYU 2KNR 2202

175/65R15 84S

10/09/02 14:36:48 31TM8610_441

－

－

－

－

－As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale

when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure.

Maximum Load Rating Means theload rating for a tire at the maximumpermissible inflation pressure forthat tire.

Recommended Inflation PressureThe cold tire inflation pressurerecommended by the manufacturer.

Treadwear Indicators (TWI)Means the projections within theprincipal grooves designed to give avisual indication of the degrees ofwear of the tread.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicatedon the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

CONTINUED

U.S. models only

Tire Labeling, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) Required FederalExplanation

TechnicalInform

ation

437

10/09/02 14:36:56 31TM8610_442

－

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combinedwith the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as longas the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

438

10/09/02 14:37:01 31TM8610_443

＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positivecrankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to the

intake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Emissions ControlsTechnicalInform

ation

439

10/09/02 14:37:08 31TM8610_444

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation, and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcome out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.The PGM-FI system uses sequential

multiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: air intake,engine control, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM)uses various sensors to determinehow much air is going into theengine. It then controls how muchfuel to inject under all operatingconditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Emissions Controls

440

10/09/02 14:37:18 31TM8610_445

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

The defective three way catalyticconverters contribute to air pollution,and can impair your engine’sperformance. Follow theseguidelines to protect your vehicle’sthree way catalytic converters.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine well maintained.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic ConverterTechnicalInform

ation

441


THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

10/09/02 14:37:24 31TM8610_446

If you take your vehicle for anemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F (4° and 35°C).

Keep the vehicle in Park. Increasethe engine speed to 2,000 rpm, andhold it there for about 3 minutes.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, let the engine idle for 20seconds.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Testing of Readiness Codes

Emissions Testing

442

10/09/02 14:37:31 31TM8610_447

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD. Do not use the cruise control.When traffic allows, drive for 90seconds without moving theaccelerator pedal. (Vehicle speedmay vary slightly; this is okay.) Ifyou cannot do this for acontinuous 90 seconds because oftraffic conditions, drive for at least30 seconds, then repeat it twomore times (for a total of 90seconds).

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 30minutes.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

7. 8.

9.

Emissions TestingTechnicalInform

ation

443

10/09/02 14:37:36 31TM8610_448

444

10/09/02 14:37:37 31TM8610_449

....Customer Service Information . 446....................Warranty Coverages . 447

.............Reporting Safety Defects . 448.....................Authorized Manuals . 449

Warranty and Customer RelationsW

arrantyand

Custom

erR

elations

445

10/09/02 14:37:40 31TM8610_450

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact HondaCustomer Service.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )

Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicle

Date of purchase

Odometer reading of your vehicle

Your name, address, and tele-phone number

A detailed description of theproblem

Name of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

430

Customer Service Information

446

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Honda Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Honda Canada Inc.Customer Relations180 Honda BoulevardMarkham, ONL6C 0H9

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: 1-877-939-0909E-Mail: [email protected]

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

Customer Relations

10/09/02 14:37:47 31TM8610_451

－

－－

－

－

－

－

－

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered by a limited warranty.Please read your warranty bookletfor details.

covers all Hondareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

covers your new vehicle, except forthe emissions control systems andaccessories, against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2011 Honda warranty informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2011 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

447

10/09/02 14:37:57 31TM8610_452

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition tonotifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists ina group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems between you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle SafetyHotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

; or write to: Administrator,NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington,DC 20590.You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from .

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which couldcause a crash or could cause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may alsoinform Transport Canada.

To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations andRecalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For moreinformation on reporting safety defects or about motorvehicle safety, go to .

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall andremedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannotbecome involved in individual problems between you,your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.

Reporting Safety Defects

In the US In Canada

448

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf ety

10/09/02 14:38:02 31TM8610_453

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order by phone or online:

Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

Covers maintenance and recommended procedures forrepair to engine and chassis components. It is writtenfor the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enoughfor most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depthtroubleshooting information for each electrical circuitin your vehicle.

Describes the procedures involved in the replacementof damaged body parts.

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

(U.S. only)

Authorized ManualsA

uthorizedM

anuals

449

Publication

Form Number

61TM801

61TM801EL

61TMA30

31TM8610

31TM8810

31TM8M10

31TM8Q10

HON-R

Form Description

2011 Honda Insight Service Manual

2011 Honda Insight

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2011 Model Series Honda Insight

Body Repair Manual

2011 Honda Insight Owner’s Manual

2011 Honda Insight

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

2011 Honda Insight Honda Service History

2011 Honda Insight Technology Reference Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

www.helminc.com

10/09/02 14:38:10 31TM8610_454

450

10/09/02 14:38:13 31TM8610_455

CONTINUED

....................................Accessories . 306ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.....................................Position) . 128.............Accessory Power Socket . 153

................Active Head Restraints . 141....................Additives, Engine Oil . 362

.............................Airbag (SRS) . 10, 25...Airbags, Additional Information . 25...Additional Safety Precautions . 37

..........Advanced Airbag System . 30.............................Airbag Service . 36



..How the SRS Indicator Works . 34How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 28...How Your Side Airbags Work . 32

How Your Side Curtain Airbags.........................................Work . 33

........................SRS Components . 25..............Air Conditioning System . 160

.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 390

................................Ambient Meter . 72......................................Antifreeze . 367

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)...............................Indicator . 64, 339

...................................Operation . 339..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 265

Anti-theft Steering Column............................................Lock . 128..........................................Armrest . 143

................................Audio System . 166.......................Auto Door Locking . 107

...................Auto Door Unlocking . 108................................Auto Idle Stop . 333

...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 23.............Automatic Speed Control . 269

.Automatic Transmission (CVT) . 323..........................Capacity, Fluid . 432

...............Checking Fluid Level . 370Paddle Shifters in the

..............................D Position . 328Paddle Shifters in the

...............................S Position . 331.....Recommended Shift Points . 332

.......................................Shifting . 324Shift Lever Position

...............................Indicators . 323

................Shift Lever Positions . 325....................Shift Lock Release . 327

......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 264

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 63, 416............................Jump Starting . 410

..............................Maintenance . 395............................Specifications . 433

..............................Before Driving . 295....................................Belts, Seat . 9, 21

...........................Beverage Holder . 149.......Bluetooth HandsFreeLink . 271

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 339

.............Break-in, New Linings . 296....................Bulb Replacement . 379

...........................................Fluid . 371...................Pad Wear Indicator . 338

.......................................Parking . 148...........System Indicator . 63, 64, 418

Index

A

B

IND

EX

I

10/09/02 14:38:17 31TM8610_456

...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii...................................Dashboard . 3, 60

..............Daytime Running Lights . 120............Defects, Reporting Safety . 446

..............Defogger, Rear Window . 123

..............Defrosting the Windows . 163....................................Dimensions . 432

.............Dimming the Headlights . 119Dipstick

..........Automatic Transmission . 370..................................Engine Oil . 301

........................Directional Signals . 118Disc Brake Pad Wear

...................................Indicators . 338............................Disc Player . 186, 216

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 366

.............................Braking System . 337.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 296

Brightness Control,...............................Instruments . 121

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 379

..............................Brake Lights . 379........Front Side Marker Lights . 378.........Front Turn Signal Lights . 377

.................................Headlights . 373..........................Parking Lights . 376

..........Rear Turn Signal Lights . 379............................Specifications . 433

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 373

.........................................Card, PC . 227.........................Cargo Area Cover . 150..........................Cargo Area Light . 158

............................Capacities Chart . 432.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 56

.............................Carrying Cargo . 308.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii

..................................Ceiling Light . 157...............................Center Pocket . 155

...................................Center Tray . 155........................Certification Label . 430

............................................Chains . 393....................Changing a Flat Tire . 401

Changing Oil........................................How to . 364......................................When to . 351

...Charging System Indicator . 63, 416............Checklist, Before Driving . 314

.....................................Child Safety . 38Child Seats

.............LATCH Anchor System . 47.............................Lower Anchor . 47............................Tether Anchor . 50

................Childproof Door Locks . 131.............................Climate Control . 160

.........................Clock, Setting the . 266........................CO in the Exhaust . 439

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 315..............................Compact Spare . 400

.................Console Compartment . 154.............Controls, Instruments and . 59

Coolant........................................Adding . 367

....................................Checking . 302.........................Proper Solution . 367

...............Temperature Indicator . 67Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 439............Cruise Control Operation . 268

.........................Customer Service . 446

Index

C

D

II

10/09/02 14:38:22 31TM8610_457

CONTINUED

........................Eco Assist System . 316.......Eco Guide Feedback Monitor . 81

................................ECON Button . 124..................................ECON Mode . 124

..............................Economy, Fuel . 303............Emergencies on the Road . 399.............Battery, Jump Starting . 410.....Brake System Indicator . 63, 418

................Changing a Flat Tire . 401Charging System

...........................Indicator . 63, 416..................Checking the Fuses . 421

Low Oil Pressure...........................Indicator . 62, 415

Malfunction Indicator................................Lamp . 62, 417

..................Overheated Engine . 412.........................Emergency Brake . 148

....................Emergency Flashers . 122...........Emergency Hatch Opener . 137

......................Emergency Towing . 426.......................Emissions Controls . 439........................Emissions Testing . 442

Engine............Adding Engine Coolant . 367

Coolant Temperature...................................Indicator . 67

.........................If It Won’t Start . 408Malfunction Indicator

................................Lamp . 62, 417.........................Oil Life Display . 351

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 415

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 362...............................Overheating . 412

............................Specifications . 432

............................Speed Limiter . 326.......................................Starting . 315

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 439

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 56Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 19

Doors...........Auto Door Locking . 107, 130

.......Auto Door Unlocking . 108, 130............Childproof Door Locks . 131............Locking and Unlocking . 130..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 434

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5...........................................Driving . 313

....................................Economy . 303..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 384

...................................Fan, Interior . 162.........................................Features . 159

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 297Filters

.........................Dust and Pollen . 384...............................................Oil . 364

...........Flashers, Hazard Warning . 122...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 401

.....................................Floor Mats . 383Fluids

..........Automatic Transmission . 370..........................................Brake . 371

..................Windshield Washer . 369FM Stereo Radio

...................................Reception . 258........................Four-way Flashers . 122

............................Front Airbags . 10, 25

Index

F

E

IND

EX

III

10/09/02 14:38:27 31TM8610_458

.................................................Fuel . 296......................Fill Door and Cap . 297

...........................................Gauge . 73................Octane Requirement . 296

...............................Oxygenated . 296........................Reserve Indicator . 70

........................Tank, Filling the . 297.....................Fuses, Checking the . 421

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 303.........................................Gasoline . 296

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 70...........................................Gauge . 73

................Octane Requirement . 296........................Tank, Filling the . 297

................Gas Station Procedures . 297Gauges

.............................Charge/Assist . 74...............................................Fuel . 73

............Gearshift Lever Positions . 323..........Automatic Transmission . 323

......................................Glove Box . 154

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 373...........................HandsFreeLink . 271

..............................................Hatch . 136......................................Opening . 136

............................Open Indicator . 68............Hazard Warning Flashers . 122

Headlights........................................Aiming . 373

.........Daytime Running Lights . 120..................High Beam Indicator . 69

......................Reminder Beeper . 119........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 373

.................................Turning on . 119............................Head Restraints . 139.............................Heated Mirrors . 145

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 315...............High-Low Beam Switch . 118

.......................Hood, Opening the . 300....................................................Horn . 4

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 430

Ignition............................................Keys . 126

.........................................Switch . 128............Timing Control System . 440

IMA System Power Flow........................................Monitor . 84

......................Immobilizer System . 127.........Important Safety Precautions . 6

.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 62

...Indicators, Messages (MID) . 62, 89...............ABS (Anti-lock Brake) . 64

..............................Auto Idle Stop . 66Brake (Parking and Brake

............................System) . 63, 418.............................Cruise Control . 69

.................................Cruise Main . 69................Door/Hatch Open . 12, 68

DRL (Daytime Running....................................Lights) . 120

.EPS (Electric Power Steering) . 68................................ECON Mode . 71

...................................High Beam . 69....High Temperature (Coolant) . 67

......................IMA Battery Level . 85.................................IMA System . 66

........Key (Immobilizer System) . 63

Index

I

H

G

IV

10/09/02 14:38:33 31TM8610_459

CONTINUED

Indicators, Messages (MID).....................................Lights On . 69......................................Low Fuel . 70

................Low Oil Pressure . 62, 415.....Low Temperature (Coolant) . 67

Low Tire Pressure/...............................TPMS . 66, 341

...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 417..........................Security System . 70...........................Side Airbag Off . 65

.................................Seat Belt . 21, 62.........................................SRS . 34, 64

.........................System Message . 70.................................TPMS . 341, 342

Turn Signal and Hazard...................................Warning . 69

12 Volt Battery Charging..............................System . 63, 416

........................................VSA Off . 65.................................VSA System . 65...............................Infant Restraint . 43

Infant Seats......LATCH Anchorage System . 47

...........................Lower Anchors . 47

...........................Tether Anchors . 51

.....Inflation, Recommended Tire . 390...................................Pressures . 390

........................Information Display . 72.................................Inside Mirror . 144

.............................Inspection, Tire . 390............................Instrument Panel . 61

................Instrument Panel Lights . 62......Instrument Panel Brightness . 121

...............................Interior Lights . 157........................................Introduction . i

.......................................iPod . 193, 241

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 403.......................................Jack, Tire . 402

................................Jump Starting . 410

................................................Keys . 126

.......................Label, Certification . 430...............Lane Change, Signaling . 119

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 17, 22...........LATCH Anchorage System . 47

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 373

.......................................Indicator . 69.......................................Parking . 118

................................Turn Signal . 118....................................Load Limits . 309

....LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 128Locks

.....Anti-theft Steering Column . 128............................Fuel Fill Door . 298

..........................................Hatch . 136...............................Power Door . 130

........................Low Coolant Level . 302.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 70

................................Lower Anchors . 47...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 415

...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 432

Index

J

K

L

IND

EX

V

10/09/02 14:38:38 31TM8610_460

..................................Maintenance . 349......Main Items and Sub Items . 356

........................................Minder . 351Owner’s Maintenance

...................................Checks . 359..........................................Safety . 350

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 62, 417.........................Meters, Gauges . 61, 72

...................Methanol in Gasoline . 296...........................................Mirrors . 144

....................................Adjusting . 144........................................Heated . 145

...................Neutral Gear Position . 325..................New Vehicle Break-in . 296

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 430

..............................Paddle Shifters . 328............Panel Brightness Control . 121

........................Park Gear Position . 325...........................................Parking . 336

...............................Parking Brake . 148Parking Brake and Brake

.................System Indicator . 63, 418...............................Parking Lights . 118

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 336

.............................PGM-FI System . 440..........Playing the Radio . 167, 179, 210

................Playing a Disc . 171, 186, 216...................Playing an iPod . 193, 241

.........................Playing a PC Card . 227Playing a USB Flash Memory

................................Device . 200, 249...................................Pollen Filter . 384

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 19

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 12...Additional Safety Precautions . 20

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19........................Protecting Children . 38.......................Protecting Infants . 43

.......Protecting Larger Children . 52.........Protecting Small Children . 44

...................Radiator Overheating . 412..........Radio/Disc/Sound System . 166

.................Radio Theft Protection . 265...................Readiness Codes . 417, 442

Rear Lights, Bulb..............................Replacement . 379

..........................Rear View Mirror . 144...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 296

.........................................Odometer . 79

Oil........................Change, How to . 364......................Change, When to . 351......................Checking Engine . 301..............Pressure Indicator . 62, 415

.......Selecting Proper Viscosity . 363.........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 128

Onboard Refueling Vapor....................................Recovery . 439

............................Outside Mirrors . 144....Outside Temperature Indicator . 80

....................Overheating, Engine . 412....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 359

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 296

Index

O

P

R

M

N

VI

10/09/02 14:38:44 31TM8610_461

CONTINUED

...............Rear Window Defogger . 123..............Reclining the Seat-backs . 138

.........Recommended Shift Points . 332................Remote Audio Controls . 263

.....................Remote Transmitter . 132Replacement Information

..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 384................Engine Oil and Filter . 364

..........................................Fuses . 421................................Light Bulbs . 373

.............Maintenance Minder . 351...........................................Tires . 389

.............................Wiper Blades . 384Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 24.............Reporting Safety Defects . 448

Reserve Tank, Engine...............................Coolant . 302, 367

...............................Restraint, Child . 38..................Reverse Gear Position . 325

................................Rotation, Tire . 392

..................................Safety Belts . 9, 21............Safety Defects, Reporting . 448

.................................Safety Features . 8.........................................Airbags . 10

.......................................Seat Belts . 9.............Safety Labels, Location of . 57

..............................Safety Messages . iii.....................................Seat Belts . 9, 21

...............Additional Information . 21Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 23.....................................Cleaning . 383

................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17, 22........................Maintenance . 24, 383

Reminder Light and................................Beeper . 21, 62

...................System Components . 21...............Use During Pregnancy . 19

Wearing a Lap/Shoulder.....................................Belt . 17, 22

......................Seats, Adjusting the . 138............................Security System . 267

...............................Serial Number . 430...........................Service Intervals . 360

.............................Service Manual . 449.........Service Station Procedures . 297

..........................Setting the Clock . 266...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 323

........................Shift Lock Release . 327..............................Side Airbags . 10, 32

..........................Off Indicator . 34, 65......................Side Curtain Airbags . 33

Side Marker Lights, Bulb..............................Replacement . 378.............................Signaling Turns . 119

.....................................Snow Tires . 393Spare Tire

......................................Inflating . 400............................Specifications . 433

....................Specifications Charts . 432................................Speed Control . 268

Speed-Sensitive Volume.......Compensation (SVC) . 185, 214

.......................................Spotlights . 157

IndexIN

DE

X

S

VII

TM

10/09/02 14:38:49 31TM8610_462

Taillights, Changing..........................................Bulbs . 379

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 399Technical Descriptions

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 434.....Emissions Control Systems . 439

....................Emissions Testing . 442.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 296

Three Way Catalytic...............................Converter . 441

...................Temperature Indicator . 67..............Tether Anchorage Points . 50

............................Theft Protection . 265..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 441

Tighten Fuel.............................Cap Message . 299

..........................Time, Setting the . 266....................................Tire Chains . 393

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 401...........................Tire Information . 434

.................................Tire Labeling . 435Tire Pressure Monitoring

............System (TPMS) . 341, 437.............................Check TPMS . 342

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS...........................Indicator . 66, 341

Required Federal............................Explanation . 437

...............................................Tires . 389..............................Air Pressure . 390

........................................Chains . 393.........................Checking Wear . 391..........................Compact Spare . 400

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 434......................................Inflation . 389

..................................Inspection . 390..............................Maintenance . 391

...................................Replacing . 392......................................Rotating . 392

................................Service Life . 391

..........SRS, Additional Information . 25...Additional Safety Precautions . 37

..........Advanced Airbag System . 30.............................Airbag Service . 36



..How the SRS Indicator Works . 34How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 28...How Your Side Airbags Work . 32

How Your Side Curtain..........................Airbags Work . 33........................SRS Components . 25

.............................SRS Indicator . 34, 64..START (Ignition Key Position) . 128

.......................Starting the Engine . 315In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 315................With a Dead Battery . 410

........Steam Coming from Engine . 412Steering Wheel

................................Adjustment . 125...........Anti-theft Column Lock . 128

....................Storing Your Vehicle . 397

......................................Sun Visors . 156Supplemental Restraint

......................................System . 25

......................................Servicing . 36.........................SRS Indicator . 34, 64

...................System Components . 25.........................................SVC . 185, 214

..................................Synthetic Oil . 363

Index

T

VIII

10/09/02 14:38:53 31TM8610_463

Tires...........................................Snow . 393

............................Specifications . 433...................Tools, Tire Changing . 402

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 347

..................Emergency Towing . 426Transmission

Checking Fluid Level,..............................Automatic . 370

...........................Fluid Selection . 371..............Identification Number . 431.............Shifting the Automatic . 324

.....................................Treadwear . 391

.................................Trip Meter . 78, 79..................................Turn Signals . 119

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 399

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 434........................Unleaded Gasoline . 296..............USB Adapter Cable . 203, 252

.USB Flash Memory Device . 201, 250.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 366

................................Vanity Mirror . 156.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 309

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 432....Vehicle Identification Number . 430

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA )....................................System . 345

...VSA Activation Indicator . 65, 345.........................VSA Off Switch . 346

........VSA System Indicator . 65, 345.............................Vehicle Storage . 397

.....................................Ventilation . 163.................................................VIN . 430

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 363

............WARNING, Explanation of . iii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 57

....................Warranty Coverages . 447Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 369...................................Operation . 117

Wheels.............Adjusting the Steering . 125

............Alignment and Balance . 391.....................................Cleaning . 394

..........................Compact Spare . 400...............................Nut Wrench . 402

Windows.............................Auto Reverse . 147

................Operating the Power . 146.........................Rear, Defogger . 163

Windshield.....................................Cleaning . 117...................................Defroster . 164

.....................................Washers . 117Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 384...................................Operation . 117....................................Worn Tires . 390

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 426

IndexIN

DE

X

WU

V

IX

10/09/02 14:38:58 31TM8610_464

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Brake Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid(CVTF):

33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Front/Rear:

Spare Tire:

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 87 or higher.

API Premium grade 0W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

3.4 US qt (3.2 )

Use Honda CVT Fluid(continuously variabletransmission fluid) only

Fluid change capacity:3.0 US qt (2.8 )

10.6 US gal (40 )

362

371

10/09/02 14:39:10 31TM8610_465

2011 insight - service expresstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/om/m81111/m81111om.pdf · 2011...

Documents